Ford - B-Max - Brochure - 2013 - 2013

FORD B-MAX Owner's Manual The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2013 All rights reserved. Part Number: CG3573en 08/2013 20130903113628 Table of Contents Clearing All MyKeys........................................31 Checking MyKey System Status................31 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems.........................................................32 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................32 Introduction About This Manual...........................................5 Symbols Glossary.............................................5 Replacement Parts Recommendation.........................................7 Mobile Communications Equipment......................................................8 Locks Locking and Unlocking.................................34 Sliding Door......................................................35 Manual Liftgate...............................................36 Keyless Entry....................................................36 At a Glance At a Glance..........................................................9 Child Safety Installing Child Seats.....................................15 Child Seat Positioning...................................18 Child Safety Locks.........................................20 Security Safety Belts Steering Wheel Fastening the Safety Belts...........................21 Safety Belt Minder..........................................22 Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................42 Audio Control...................................................42 Voice Control...................................................43 Cruise Control..................................................43 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................39 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................39 Supplementary Restraints System Wipers and Washers Principle of Operation...................................23 Driver Airbag.....................................................23 Passenger Airbag...........................................24 Side Airbags.....................................................24 Driver Knee Airbag.........................................25 Side Curtain Airbags......................................25 Windshield Wipers........................................44 Autowipers.......................................................44 Windshield Washers.....................................45 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........45 Lighting Keys and Remote Controls General Information......................................47 Lighting Control...............................................47 Autolamps........................................................48 Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................49 Headlamp Exit Delay....................................49 Daytime Running Lamps............................49 Front Fog Lamps............................................49 Rear Fog Lamps.............................................50 Headlamp Leveling.......................................50 Direction Indicators........................................51 General Information on Radio Frequencies..................................................26 Remote Control..............................................26 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control...........................................................29 MyKey™ Principle of Operation..................................30 Creating a MyKey...........................................30 Programming a MyKey..................................31 1 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Table of Contents Interior Lamps..................................................51 Auxiliary Power Points Windows and Mirrors Auxiliary Power Points.................................88 Cigar Lighter.....................................................88 Power Windows..............................................53 Exterior Mirrors................................................54 Interior Mirror...................................................55 Childminder Mirror.........................................56 Global Opening and Closing......................56 Storage Compartments Cup Holders.....................................................89 Glasses Holder................................................89 Starting and Stopping the Engine Instrument Cluster Gauges...............................................................58 Warning Lamps and Indicators................58 Audible Warnings and Indicators..............61 General Information.....................................90 Ignition Switch................................................90 Keyless Starting.............................................90 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without: Keyless Entry and Push Button Start/Push Button Start..........................92 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With: Keyless Entry and Push Button Start/Push Button Start..........................92 Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................93 Starting a Diesel Engine..............................94 Diesel Particulate Filter...............................94 Switching Off the Engine............................95 Information Displays General Information......................................63 Clock...................................................................66 Trip Computer.................................................66 Personalized Settings...................................67 Information Messages..................................67 Climate Control Principle of Operation...................................75 Air Vents.............................................................75 Manual Climate Control..............................76 Automatic Climate Control.........................77 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate...........................................................79 Heated Windows and Mirrors....................82 Unique Driving Characteristics Auto-Start-Stop.............................................96 Fuel and Refueling Safety Precautions........................................98 Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................99 Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................99 Running Out of Fuel......................................99 Catalytic Converter.....................................100 Refueling...........................................................101 Fuel Consumption.......................................102 Technical Specifications............................103 Seats Sitting in the Correct Position...................83 Head Restraints..............................................83 Manual Seats..................................................85 Rear Seats........................................................86 Heated Seats...................................................87 Front Seat Armrest........................................87 Transmission Manual Transmission.................................104 2 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Table of Contents Automatic Transmission...........................104 Hill Start Assist..............................................107 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels Vehicles With: Automatic Transmission..............................................128 Brakes Driving Hints General Information....................................109 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes...........................................................109 Parking Brake.................................................109 Breaking-In.....................................................130 Cold Weather Precautions........................130 Driving Through Water...............................130 Floor Mats.......................................................130 Stability Control Roadside Emergencies Principle of Operation...................................111 Using Stability Control..................................111 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................132 First Aid Kit......................................................132 Warning Triangle...........................................132 Jump-Starting the Vehicle.........................132 Parking Aids Principle of Operation..................................112 Parking Aid.......................................................112 Rear View Camera.........................................114 Fuses Fuse Box Locations......................................134 Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built Up To: 04-01-2013...................................135 Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built From: 05-01-2013....................................144 Changing a Fuse...........................................150 Cruise Control Principle of Operation..................................117 Using Cruise Control.....................................117 Driving Aids Active City Stop..............................................119 Maintenance General Information....................................152 Opening and Closing the Hood...............152 Under Hood Overview - 1.0L EcoBoost™.................................................154 Under Hood Overview - 1.4L Duratec-16V (Sigma)/1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)........................................................155 Under Hood Overview - 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi/1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel.................................................156 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.0L EcoBoost™.................................................157 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.4L Duratec-16V (Sigma)/1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)........................................................157 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi/1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel..................................................157 Load Carrying General Information.....................................121 Luggage Anchor Points................................121 Rear Under Floor Storage...........................121 Cargo Nets.......................................................122 Luggage Covers.............................................122 Dog Guard........................................................122 Towing Towing a Trailer.............................................124 Tow Ball............................................................125 Towing Points.................................................127 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels Vehicles With: Manual Transmission..............................................128 3 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Table of Contents Engine Oil Check...........................................157 Engine Coolant Check................................158 Brake and Clutch Fluid Check..................159 Washer Fluid Check.....................................159 Changing the 12V Battery..........................159 Checking the Wiper Blades......................160 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................160 Adjusting the Headlamps..........................161 Removing a Headlamp................................161 Changing a Bulb............................................162 Bulb Specification Chart...........................168 Technical Specifications...........................169 Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/Bluetooth...........................196 Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/Navigation System........202 Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/CD................................................208 Audio unit - Vehicles With: Navigation System/Sony AM/FM/CD.....................214 Audio System Security...............................219 Digital Audio...................................................219 Compact Disc Player - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD..................................................221 Compact Disc Player - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/Bluetooth/Sony AM/FM/CD.................................................224 Auxiliary Input Jack.....................................228 Audio Troubleshooting..............................229 Vehicle Care Cleaning the Exterior....................................172 Cleaning the Interior.....................................172 Repairing Minor Paint Damage................173 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................173 Navigation Navigation......................................................230 Wheels and Tires SYNC™ General Information....................................174 Temporary Mobility Kit................................174 Tire Care............................................................177 Using Winter Tires.........................................177 Using Snow Chains......................................178 Tire Pressure Monitoring System............178 Changing a Road Wheel............................179 Technical Specifications............................183 General Information...................................239 Using Voice Recognition...........................240 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............243 SYNC™ Applications and Services......253 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player...........................................................256 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................260 Capacities and Specifications Electromagnetic compatibility..............268 End User License Agreement.................269 Appendices Vehicle Identification Plate......................186 Vehicle Identification Number.................187 Technical Specifications............................187 Audio System General Information....................................190 Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD..................................................191 4 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Right-hand side B Left-hand side Protecting the Environment You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Safety alert Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct. See Owner's Manual Air conditioning system Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Anti-lock braking system Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. Avoid smoking, flames or sparks This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Battery 5 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A Introduction Battery acid Explosive gas Brake fluid - non petroleum based Fan warning Brake system Fasten safety belt Cabin air filter Front airbag Check fuel cap Front fog lamps Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment Child seat tether anchor Hazard warning flashers Cruise control Heated rear window Do not open when hot Heated windshield Engine air filter Interior luggage compartment release Jack Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children Engine coolant temperature Lighting control Engine oil Low tire pressure warning 6 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Introduction Maintain correct fluid level REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Note operating instructions Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. Panic alarm Parking aid Parking brake Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs Power steering fluid One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. Power windows front/rear Power window lockout Collision Repairs Service engine soon We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. Side airbag Shield the eyes Stability control Windshield wash and wipe 7 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Introduction Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 8 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 At a Glance Front Exterior Overview A See Locking and Unlocking (page 34). See Keyless Entry (page 36). B See Active City Stop (page 119). C See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 160). D See Maintenance (page 152). E See Towing Points (page 127). F See Changing a Bulb (page 162). G Tire pressures. See Technical Specifications (page 183). H See Changing a Road Wheel (page 179). 9 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 At a Glance Vehicle Interior Overview A See Transmission (page 104). B See Locking and Unlocking (page 34). C See Power Windows (page 53). See Exterior Mirrors (page 54). D See Head Restraints (page 83). E See Fastening the Safety Belts (page 21). F See Rear Seats (page 86). G See Manual Seats (page 85). H See Parking Brake (page 109). I See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 152). 10 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 At a Glance Instrument Panel Overview Left-Hand Drive 11 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 At a Glance Right-Hand Drive A Air vents. See Air Vents (page 75). B Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 51). High beam. See Lighting Control (page 47). C Instrument cluster. See Gauges (page 58). See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 58). D Start button. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 90). E Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 44). F Information and entertainment display. See Information Displays (page 63). G Audio unit. See Audio System (page 190). H Power door lock button. See Locking and Unlocking (page 34). I Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 132). J Climate controls. See Climate Control (page 75). J Heated rear window switch. See Climate Control (page 75). J Heated windshield switch. See Climate Control (page 75). 12 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 At a Glance K Parking aid switch. See Parking Aids (page 112). L Start-stop switch. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 96). M Card holder or airbag warning lamp. See Passenger Airbag (page 24). N Ignition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 90). O Cruise control switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 117). P Horn. Q Driver knee airbag. See Driver Knee Airbag (page 25). R Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 42). S Audio control. See Audio System (page 190). Voice control. See Voice Control (page 43). T Hood release lever. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 152). U Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 47). Front fog lamps. See Front Fog Lamps (page 49). Rear fog lamp. See Rear Fog Lamps (page 50). Instrument lighting dimmer. See Instrument Lighting Dimmer (page 49). 13 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 At a Glance Rear Exterior Overview A See Changing a Bulb (page 162). B See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 160). C See Changing a Bulb (page 162). D See First Aid Kit (page 132). See Warning Triangle (page 132). See Temporary Mobility Kit (page 174). Spare wheel, jack, and wheel brace. See Changing a Road Wheel (page 179). Towing eye. See Towing Points (page 127). E See Towing Points (page 127). F Tire pressures. See Technical Specifications (page 183). G See Changing a Road Wheel (page 179). H See Refueling (page 101). 14 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Child Safety INSTALLING CHILD SEATS WARNINGS If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the child seats checked by an authorized dealer. Note: Mandatory use of child seats varies from country to country. Only child seats certified to ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested and approved for use in your vehicle. A choice of these are available from an authorized dealer. Child Seats for Different Mass Groups Use the correct child seat as follows: Baby Safety Seat WARNINGS Use an approved child seat to secure children less than 59 inches (150 centimeters) tall in the rear seat. Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child seat on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it! Secure children that weigh less than 29 pounds (13 kilograms) in a rearward facing baby safety seat (Group 0+) on the rear seat. Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions when you are installing a child seat. Do not modify child seats in any way. Do not hold a child on your lap when your vehicle is moving. Do not leave unattended children in your vehicle. 15 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Child Safety Child Safety Seat Booster Seat (Group 2) Secure children that weigh between 29 and 40 pounds (13 and 18 kilograms) in a child safety seat (Group 1) on the rear seat. Secure children that weigh more than 33 pounds (15 kilograms) but are less than 59 inches (150 centimeters) tall in a booster seat or a booster cushion. Booster Seats We recommend that you use a booster seat that combines a cushion with a backrest instead of a booster cushion only. The raised seating position will allow you to position the shoulder strap of the adult safety belt over the center of your child’s shoulder and the lap strap tightly across their hips. WARNINGS Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with only the lap strap of the safety belt. Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with a safety belt that is slack or twisted. Booster Cushion (Group 3) Do not put the safety belt under your child’s arm or behind their back. Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child’s height. Make sure that your children sit in an upright position. Note: When using a child seat on a rear seat, make sure that the child seat rests tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 83). 16 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Child Safety ISOFIX Anchor Points Attaching a Child Seat with Top Tethers WARNING WARNINGS Do not attach a tether strap to anything other than the correct tether anchor point. Use an anti-rotation device when using the ISOFIX system. We recommend the use of a top tether or support leg. Make sure that the top tether strap is not slack or twisted and is properly located on the anchor point. Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX seat, make sure that you know the correct mass group and ISOFIX size class for the intended seating locations. See Child Seat Positioning (page 18). Note: Where applicable, remove the luggage cover to ease installation. See Luggage Covers (page 122). Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that accommodate universally approved ISOFIX child seats. Note: You may need to raise or remove the head restraint to ease installation. See Head Restraints (page 83). The ISOFIX system comprises two rigid attachment arms on the child seat that attach to anchor points on the outboard rear seats, where the cushion and backrest meet. Tether anchor points are located behind the outboard rear seats for child seats with a top tether. 1. Route the tether strap under the head restraint to the anchor point. Top Tether Anchor Points 2. Push the child seat back firmly to engage the ISOFIX lower anchor points. 3. Tighten the tether strap in line with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. 17 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Child Safety CHILD SEAT POSITIONING WARNINGS The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 83). WARNINGS See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended child seats. Note: When using a child seat on a front seat, always adjust the front passenger's seat to its fully rearward position. If it proves difficult to tighten the lap section of the safety belt without slack remaining, adjust the seatback to the fully upright position and raise the height of the seat. See Seats (page 83). Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child seat on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it! When using a child seat with a support leg, the support leg must rest securely on the floor. When using a child seat with a safety belt, make sure that the safety belt is not slack or twisted. Mass group categories 0 0+ Up to 22 lbs (10 kg) Up to 29 lbs (13 kg) Front passenger's seat with airbag ON X X UF¹ UF¹ UF¹ Front passenger's seat with airbag OFF U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹ Rear seats U U U U U Seating positions 1 2 3 20 - 40 lbs 33 - 55 lbs 46 - 79 lbs (9 - 18 kg) (15 - 25 kg) (22 - 36 kg) X Not suitable for children in this mass group. U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, on the rear seat. UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, on the rear seat. 18 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Child Safety ISOFIX Child Seats Mass group categories 0+ 1 Rear facing Forward facing Up to 29 lbs (13 kg) 20 - 40 lbs (9 - 18 kg) Seating positions Front seat Size class Not ISOFIX equipped Seat type Rear outboard seat ISOFIX Rear center seat Size class C, D, E Seat type IL 1 Size class 2 1 A, B, B1 3 IL, IUF Not ISOFIX equipped Seat type IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child seat systems of the semi-universal category. Please see child seat systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists. IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child seat systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class. 1 The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child seat systems is defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on the ISOFIX child seat. 2 At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax Romer Baby Safe. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended child seats. 3 At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer Duo. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended child seats. 19 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Child Safety CHILD SAFETY LOCKS WARNING You cannot open the doors from inside if you have put the child safety locks on. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock. 20 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Safety Belts FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS WARNINGS Insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear a distinct click. You have not fastened the safety belt correctly if you do not hear a click. Make sure that your safety belt is securely stored away and is not outside your vehicle when closing the door. Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you pull it sharply or if your vehicle is on a slope. Press the red button on the buckle to release the belt. Let it retract completely and smoothly. Note: When not in use, place the safety belts in to the slots on the outboard trim. 21 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Safety Belts Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy It will also illuminate when a front safety belt is unfastened when your vehicle is moving. If you do not fasten your safety belt both the audible and visual warnings will switch off automatically after approximately five minutes. Turning the Safety Belt Minder Off See an authorized dealer. WARNING Position the safety belt correctly for your safety and that of your unborn child. Do not use only the lap strap or the shoulder strap. Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt. The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow. The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. SAFETY BELT MINDER WARNING The system will only provide protection when you use the safety belt correctly. The warning lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound when the following conditions have been met: • The front safety belts have not been fastened. • Your vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed. 22 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Supplementary Restraints System Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Extreme Hazard! Never use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an active airbag in front of it. Death or serious injury to the child can occur. Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp cloth. DRIVER AIRBAG Do not modify the front of your vehicle in any way. This could adversely affect deployment of the airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. Wear a safety belt and keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Only when you use the safety belt correctly, can it hold you in a position that allows the airbag to achieve its optimum effect. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 83). Failure to adhere to this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. The airbag will deploy during significant frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupant, thus cushioning forward body movement. During minor frontal collisions, overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the airbag will not deploy. Repairs to the steering wheel, steering column, seats, airbags and safety belts must be carried out by an authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. In the event of a crash, hard objects could cause serious personal injury or death. Do not puncture the seat with sharp objects. This could damage and adversely affect deployment of the airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. Use seat covers designed for seats with side airbags. Have these fitted by an authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. 23 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Supplementary Restraints System PASSENGER AIRBAG A Switch off B Switch on Turn the switch to position A. When you switch the ignition on, check that the airbag deactivation warning lamp illuminates. The airbag will deploy during significant frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupant, thus cushioning forward body movement. During minor frontal collisions, overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the airbag will not deploy. Switching the Passenger Airbag On WARNING You must switch the airbag on when you are not using a child seat on the front seat. Switching the Passenger Airbag Off Turn the switch to position B. WARNING SIDE AIRBAGS You must switch the airbag off when using a rearward facing child seat on the front seat. WARNING Use seat covers designed for seats with side airbags. Have these fitted by an authorized dealer. 24 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Supplementary Restraints System SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS The airbags are located inside the seatback of the front seats. There is a label attached to the side of the seatback to indicate this. The airbags are located over the front and rear side windows. The airbag will deploy during significant lateral collisions. The airbag will not deploy in minor lateral and frontal collisions, rear collisions, or overturns. The airbag will deploy during significant lateral collisions. It will also deploy during significant frontal angled collisions. The curtain airbag will not deploy in minor lateral and frontal collisions, rear collisions, or overturns. DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG WARNING Do not attempt to open the airbag cover. The airbag will deploy during frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus providing a cushion between the driver’s knees and the steering column. During overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the knee airbag will not deploy. For item location: See At a Glance (page 9). Note: The airbag has a lower deployment threshold than the front airbags. During a minor collision, it is possible that only the knee airbag will deploy. 25 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Keys and Remote Controls Programming a New Remote Control GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES 1. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2. The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). 3. A decrease in operating range could be caused by: • weather conditions • nearby radio towers • structures around your vehicle • other vehicles parked next to your vehicle. 4. 5. The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions (e.g. amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems). If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. Reprogramming the Unlocking Function Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended. Note: When you press the unlock button either all the doors are unlocked or only the driver’s door and the liftgate are unlocked. Pressing the unlock button again unlocks all the doors. Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally. Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons on the remote control simultaneously for at least four seconds with the ignition off. The direction indicators will flash twice to confirm the change. REMOTE CONTROL You can program a maximum of eight remote controls to your vehicle. This includes any that were supplied with your vehicle. The remote controls must remain inside your vehicle during the programming procedure. Fasten the front safety belts and close all doors to make sure that conflicting chimes do not sound during programming. To return to the original unlocking function, repeat the process. 26 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Turn the ignition key from position 0 to position II four times within six seconds. Turn the ignition to position 0. A tone sounds to indicate that it is now possible to program a remote control. Press any button on a new remote control within 10 seconds. A tone will sound as confirmation. Repeat step three within 10 seconds for each new remote control. Do not remove the key from the ignition when pressing the button on the remote control. Switch the ignition back on (position II) or wait for 10 seconds without programming another remote control to end the key programming. Only the remote controls which you have just programmed are now able to lock and unlock your vehicle. Keys and Remote Controls Changing the Remote Control Battery Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority regarding recycling. Remote Control With a Folding Key Blade 3. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to separate the two halves of the remote control. 1. Insert a screwdriver as far as possible into the slot on the side of the remote control, push it toward the key blade and remove the key blade. Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 4. Carefully remove the battery with the screwdriver. 5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with the + facing downwards. 6. Assemble the two halves of the remote control. 7. Install the key blade. 2. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to start separating the two halves of the remote control. 27 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Keys and Remote Controls Remote Control Without a Folding Key Blade 4. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to separate the two halves of the remote control. 1. Press and hold the buttons on the edges to release the cover. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Remove the key blade. Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 5. Carefully remove the battery with the screwdriver. 6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with the + facing downwards. 3. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to start separating the two halves of the remote control. 7. Assemble the two halves of the remote control. 8. Install the key blade. 28 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Keys and Remote Controls REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Replacement or additional keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Your dealer can program the remote controls for your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See Remote Control (page 26). To re-program the passive anti-theft system see an authorized dealer. 29 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 MyKey™ Optional Settings PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION You can configure MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key. The system allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. You can use all but one of the keys programmed to your vehicle with these restricted modes. The following settings can be configured using an admin key: • Various vehicle speed limits can be set. Warnings will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal. • Various vehicle speed reminders can be set. Warnings will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when the set vehicle speed is exceeded. • Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume. Automatic volume control will be disabled. • Always on setting. When this is selected you will not be able to disable emergency assistance or the do not disturb feature. Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as an administrator key or admin key. These can be used to: • create a MyKey • program optional MyKey settings • clear all MyKey features. When you have programmed a MyKey, you can access the following information using the information display: • How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle. • The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey. Note: Switch the ignition on to use the system. Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings. You cannot program them individually. Standard Settings Vehicles with Keyless Entry The following settings cannot be changed: • Safety belt minder. You cannot disable this feature. The audio system will mute when this feature is activated. • Low fuel level warning. When the fuel level is low, warnings will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone. • Driver assist features, for example navigation and parking aids. These systems turn on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. If a MyKey and an admin key are present, your vehicle will recognize the admin key only. CREATING A MYKEY Vehicles without Keyless Starting 1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition. 2. Switch the ignition on. 3. Access the main menu using the information display. Select MyKey and press OK or the right arrow button. 30 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 MyKey™ 4. Select Create MyKey and press OK. 5. When prompted, press and hold OK until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The key will be restricted the next time you use it. Note: Make sure you label the MyKey so you can distinguish it from the admin keys. PROGRAMMING A MYKEY Vehicles with Keyless Starting 3. Optional Settings 1. 2. 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. 2. Access the main menu using the information display. Select MyKey and press OK or the right arrow button. 4. 5. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. Access the main menu using the information display. Select MyKey and press OK or the right arrow button. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to an optional feature. Press OK or the right arrow button to scroll through the settings. Press OK or the right arrow button to make a selection. CLEARING ALL MYKEYS Note: Clearing all MyKeys will return the admin key to its default setting and reset the Mykey distance to zero. 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. 2. Access the main menu using the information display. Select MyKey and press OK or the right arrow button. 3. Scroll to Clear All and press OK. 4. Press and hold OK until you see a message informing you that all MyKeys have been cleared. 3. Hold the key you want to program next to the steering column exactly as shown. 4. Select Create MyKey and press OK. 5. When prompted, press and hold OK until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The key will be restricted the next time you use it. Note: Make sure you label the MyKey so you can distinguish it from the admin keys. CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display. 31 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 MyKey™ MyKey Distance Number of Admin Keys Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey. Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many admin keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed. Number of MyKeys USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted. MyKey is not compatible with non Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system. MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING All Vehicles Condition Potential Causes I cannot create a MyKey. The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key. The key used to start the vehicle is the only key. There always has to be at least one admin key. I cannot program the configurable settings. The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 30). I cannot clear the MyKeys. The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 30). I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer. I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 39). The MyKey distance does not accumulate. The MyKey is not being used by the intended user. The MyKeys have been cleared. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 31). 32 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 MyKey™ Vehicles With Push Button Start Condition Potential Causes I cannot create a MyKey. The key is not in the backup position. See Creating a MyKey (page 30). There are no MyKey driving modes. An admin key is present when you switch the ignition on. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 30). 33 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Locks Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, and the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed. LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Power Door Locks • Press the button once. The doors will lock. Press the button again. The doors will unlock. For item location: See At a Glance (page 9). Note: If any door or the luggage compartment is not closed, or if the hood is not closed on vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the lamps will not flash. Remote Control Double Locking • WARNING The remote control can be used any time your vehicle is not running. Do not use double locking when passengers or animals are inside your vehicle. You will not be able to unlock the doors from the inside if you have double locked them. Unlocking the Doors Note: You can unlock the driver's door with the key. Use the key when the remote control is not functioning. Double locking is a theft protection feature that prevents someone from opening the doors from the inside. You can only double lock the doors if they are all closed. Note: When you lock your vehicle for several weeks, the remote control will be switched off. Your vehicle must be unlocked and the engine started using the key. Unlocking and starting your vehicle once will enable the remote control. Press the button twice within three seconds. Press the button to unlock the driver’s door. Automatic Relocking Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The direction indicators will flash. The doors will relock automatically if you do not open a door within 45 seconds of unlocking the doors with the remote control. The door locks and the alarm will return to their previous state. Reprogramming the Unlocking Function Locking and Unlocking the Doors From Inside You can reprogram the unlocking function so that only the driver’s door is unlocked. See Remote Control (page 26). Press the button. For item location: See At a Glance (page 9). Locking the Doors Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will illuminate. Locking and Unlocking the Doors With the Key Note: Do not leave your keys in your vehicle. 34 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Locks Locking With the Key Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle. Double Locking With the Key Turn the key to the lock position twice within three seconds. Unlocking With the Key Note: If the child safety locks are on and you pull the interior handle, you will only turn off the emergency locking, not the child safety lock. You can only open the doors using the external door handle. Push to lock. Note: If the doors have been unlocked using this method, the doors must be locked individually until the central locking function has been repaired. SLIDING DOOR Unlock the driver's door using the key. You can unlock all other doors individually by pulling the interior door handles. Note: When the central locking function fails to operate, lock the doors individually using the key in the position shown. When the rear doors are fully open, make sure that you do not step on the cable or mechanism at the base of the door aperture. 35 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Locks Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, then pull on the outside handle. MANUAL LIFTGATE WARNINGS It is extremely dangerous to ride in the cargo area, inside or outside of your vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that does not have seats and safety belts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt correctly. Opening With the Remote Control Press the button twice within three seconds. To Close the Liftgate Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into your vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate door open, keep your vehicle well ventilated so outside air does not enter your vehicle. Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. Note: Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.) from the spoiler, glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components. A recessed grip is located inside the liftgate to help with closing. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components. KEYLESS ENTRY Opening and Closing the Liftgate General Information WARNING To Open the Liftgate The system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cell phones. The system will not function if: • Your vehicle battery has no charge. • The passive key frequencies are jammed. • The passive key battery is flat. 36 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Locks Note: If the system does not function, you will need to use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle. WARNING Your vehicle does not lock itself automatically. If you do not press a locking button your vehicle will remain unlocked. The system allows you to operate your vehicle without the use of a key or remote control. Locking buttons are located on each of the front doors. For central locking and to arm the alarm, press a locking button once. For double locking and to arm the alarm, press a locking button twice within three seconds. Note: When locking your vehicle, do not grip the door handle. Note: Your vehicle will remain locked for approximately three seconds. When the delay period is over, you can open the doors again, provided the passive key is within the respective detection range. Passive locking and unlocking requires a valid passive key to be located within one of the three external detection ranges. These are located approximately five feet (one and a half meters) from the front door handles and the liftgate. Two short flashes of the direction indicators confirms that all the doors and the liftgate have been locked and that the alarm has been armed. Passive Key Liftgate Your vehicle can be locked and unlocked with the passive key. You can use the passive key as a remote control. See Locking and Unlocking (page 34). Note: The liftgate cannot be closed and will pop back up if the passive key is located inside the luggage compartment with the doors locked. Locking Your Vehicle Note: If a second valid passive key is located within the liftgate detection range, the liftgate can be closed. 37 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Locks Unlocking Your Vehicle To enable all your passive keys, unlock your vehicle using a passive key that has not been disabled or the remote control unlocking function. Note: When your vehicle remains locked for longer than three days, the system will enter an energy-saving mode. This is to prevent your vehicle battery running out of charge. When your vehicle is unlocked while in this mode, the reaction time of the system may be a little longer than normal. To exit the energy-saving mode, unlock your vehicle. All passive keys will then be enabled if you switch the ignition on or you start your vehicle with a valid key. Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door. One long flash of the direction indicators confirms that all the doors and the liftgate have been unlocked and that the alarm has been disarmed. Unlocking Only the Driver's Door If the unlocking function is reprogrammed so that only the driver’s door and the liftgate are unlocked. See Remote Control (page 26). Note the following: If the driver’s door is the first door which is opened, the other doors will remain locked. All the other doors can be unlocked from inside your vehicle by pressing the unlock button on the instrument panel. For item location: See At a Glance (page 9). Doors can be unlocked individually by pulling the interior door handles on those doors. 1. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Remove the key blade and insert it into the lock. Note: Only the driver's door handle has a lock cylinder. If the front passenger's door is the first door which is opened, all the doors and the liftgate will be unlocked. Disabled Keys Any keys left inside your vehicle interior when it is locked will be disabled. You cannot use a disabled key to switch the ignition on or start the engine. You must enable all passive keys again in order to use them. 38 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Security • • • PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Principle of Operation The system prevents someone from starting the engine with an incorrectly coded key. Perimeter alarm. Perimeter alarm with interior sensors. Category one alarm with interior sensors and battery back-up sounder. Perimeter Alarm The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against unauthorized access to your vehicle through the doors and the hood. It also protects the audio unit. Coded Keys If you lose a key, you can obtain a replacement from an authorized dealer. If possible, provide them with the key number from the tag provided with the original keys. You can also obtain extra keys from an authorized dealer. Interior Sensors Note: Have all of your remaining keys erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have replacement keys coded together with recoding your remaining keys. See an authorized dealer for further information. WARNINGS Do not cover up the interior lamp unit sensors. Note: Do not shield your keys with metal objects. This may prevent the receiver from recognizing a coded key. Do not arm the alarm with full guard if passengers, animals or other moving objects are inside your vehicle. Arming the Engine Immobilizer When you switch the ignition off the engine immobilizer will arm automatically after a short time. The sensors act as a deterrent against unauthorized intrusion by sensing any movement within your vehicle. Disarming the Engine Immobilizer When you switch the ignition on the engine immobilizer will disarm automatically if a correctly coded key is used. Battery Back-up Sounder The battery back-up sounder is an extra alarm system which will sound a siren when the alarm is triggered. When you lock your vehicle the system is armed. The sounder has its own battery and will sound an alarm siren even if someone disconnects your vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself. If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. ANTI-THEFT ALARM Alarm System Your vehicle may have one of the following alarm systems: 39 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Security Triggering the Alarm Ask on Exit (If Equipped) Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any of the following ways: You can set the information display to ask you each time which level of guard you wish to set. • • • • • If someone opens a door, the liftgate or the hood without a valid key or remote control. If someone removes the audio or navigation system. If you switch the ignition on without a valid key. If the interior sensors detect movement within your vehicle. On vehicles with a battery back-up sounder, if someone disconnects your vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself. If you select Ask on Exit, the message Reduced guard? appears in the information display each time you switch the ignition off. See Information Messages (page 67). If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press the OK button when this message appears. If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave your vehicle without pressing the OK button. Selecting Full or Reduced Guard If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will sound for 30 seconds and the hazard warning flasher will flash for five minutes. Note: Selecting Reduced does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. It sets it to reduced guard only for the current ignition cycle. If you regularly set the alarm to reduced guard, select Ask on Exit. Any further attempts to perform one of the above will trigger the alarm again. Full Guard You can select full or reduced guard using the information display. See General Information (page 67). Full guard is the standard setting. Arming the Alarm In full guard, the interior sensors are on when you arm the alarm. To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See Locks (page 34). Note: This may result in false alarms if animals or moving objects are inside your vehicle. Disarming the Alarm Full and Reduced Guard Vehicles Without Keyless Entry Reduced Guard Perimeter Alarm In reduced guard, the interior sensors are off when you arm the alarm. Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching the ignition on with a correctly coded key or unlocking the doors with the remote control. Note: You can set the alarm to reduced guard for the current ignition cycle only. The alarm will reset to full guard the next time you switch the ignition on. 40 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Security Category One Alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching the ignition on with a correctly coded key within 12 seconds or unlocking the doors with the remote control. Vehicles with Keyless Entry Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door for keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 36). Perimeter Alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching the ignition on or unlocking the doors with the remote control. Category One Alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching the ignition on within 12 seconds or unlocking the doors or the liftgate with the remote control. 41 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 83). 3. Lock the steering column. AUDIO CONTROL Select the required source on the audio unit. You can operate the following functions with the control: 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 42 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A Volume up B Seek up, next or end call Steering Wheel C Volume down D Seek down, previous or accept call CRUISE CONTROL Seek, Next or Previous Press the seek button to: • tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset • play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band • seek through a track. See Cruise Control (page 117). VOICE CONTROL Press the button to select or deselect voice control. See SYNC™ (page 239). 43 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wipers and Washers Intermittent Wipe WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers. Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash. Note: Install new wiper blades as soon as they begin to leave bands of water and smears on the windshield. Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. A Short wipe interval B Intermittent wipe C Long wipe interval Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval. Speed Dependent Wipers When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes will decrease. AUTOWIPERS Note: Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers. A Single wipe B Intermittent wipe C Normal wipe D High speed wipe Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash. Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. Note: If you press and hold the wiper lever in position A, the wipers will continue to wipe until you release the wiper lever. Note: If you switch autolamps on in conjunction with autowipers, low beam headlamps will illuminate automatically when the rain sensor activates the windshield wipers continuously. Wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or salty road mist can cause inconsistent and unexpected wiping or smearing. 44 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wipers and Washers In these conditions, you can do the following to help keep your windshield clear: • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers. • Change the wiper speed to normal or high speed wipe as necessary. • Switch the autowipers off. Keep the outside of the windshield clean. Sensor performance will be affected if the area around the interior mirror is dirty. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or flies hit the windshield. WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. A Maximum autowipe B On C Minimum autowipe Push the button to operate the washers. When you release the button, the wipers will operate for a short time. The wipers will function when water is detected on the windshield. The rain sensor will continue to monitor the amount of water on the windshield and adjust the speed of the wipers automatically. This feature can be switched on or off in the information display. See General Information (page 63). REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Intermittent Wipe Note: When you switch this feature off, the wipers will return to the variable intermittent setting based on the sensitivity you have set. Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor. On minimum autowipe, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. On maximum autowipe, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield. Pull the lever toward you. 45 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wipers and Washers Reverse Gear Wipe The rear wiper will turn on automatically when selecting reverse gear if: • the rear wiper is not already switched on • the wiper lever is in position A, B, C or D • the front wiper is operating (when set to position B). Rear Window Washer Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Pull the lever toward you to operate the washers. They will operate for a maximum of 10 seconds. When you release the lever, the wiper will operate for a short time. 46 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in Lamp Assemblies Lighting Control Positions Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. Examples of acceptable condensation are: • The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets). • A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. Examples of unacceptable condensation are: • A water puddle inside the lamp. • Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. Off B Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps C Headlamps Parking Lamps Note: Prolonged use of the parking lamps will cause the battery to run out of charge. If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Switch the ignition off. Turn the lighting control to position B. 47 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A Lighting High Beams Pull the lever fully toward you to switch the high beams on. The headlamps will switch on and off automatically in low light situations or during inclement weather. Push the lever forward to switch the high beams off. The headlamps will remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. You can adjust the time delay using the information display controls. See Information Displays (page 63). Headlamp Flasher Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps. AUTOLAMPS Note: If you switch autolamps on in conjunction with autowipers, low beam headlamps will illuminate automatically when the rain sensor turns on the windshield wipers continuously. Note: It may be necessary to switch your headlamps on manually in severe weather conditions. Note: If you have autolamps on, you can only switch the high beam on once autolamps has switched the headlamps on. Note: If you have autolamps on, you can only switch the front fog lamps on once autolamps has switched the headlamps on. 48 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Lighting INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS WARNING Always remember to switch your headlamps on in low light situations or during inclement weather. The system does not turn on the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to switch the headlamps on under these conditions may result in a collision. The system switches the headlamps on in low light situations. To switch the system on: 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Turn the lighting control to the off, autolamp or parking lamp position. 3. Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P. Press it repeatedly or press it and hold it until the desired level is reached. Note: If you disconnect the battery or it loses charge the instrument lighting will return to its brightest setting. FRONT FOG LAMPS HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY After you switch the ignition off, you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on. Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off. You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except off. 49 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Lighting Note: Only use fog lamps during reduced visibility, for example, fog, snow or heavy rain. Note: Do not use the rear fog lamps when it is raining or snowing. Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can only switch the fog lamps on once autolamps has turned the headlamps on. Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can only switch the fog lamps on once autolamps has turned the headlamps on. HEADLAMP LEVELING REAR FOG LAMPS Note: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps have automatic headlamp leveling. 1. Press to release the pop out button. Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off. You can only switch the rear fog lamps on when either the front fog lamps or low beam headlamps are on. 2. Rotate the button to the required setting. 3. Push the button to the closed position. Note: Only use the rear fog lamps when visibility is less than 164 feet (50 meters). You can adjust the level of the headlamp beams according to your vehicle load. 50 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Lighting Recommended Headlamp Leveling Switch Positions Load 1 Load in luggage compartment Switch position - - 0 2 3 - 2 3 1 - Front seats Second row seats 1-2 1.5 Max 1 2.5 Max 1 3.5 See Vehicle Identification Plate (page 186). INTERIOR LAMPS DIRECTION INDICATORS Courtesy Lamp Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change. Off B Door contact C On If you set the switch to position B, the courtesy lamp will illuminate when you unlock or open a door or the liftgate. If you leave a door open with the ignition switched off, the courtesy lamp will go off automatically after some time to prevent your vehicle battery from losing charge. To switch it back on, switch the ignition on for a short time. 51 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A Lighting The courtesy lamp will also illuminate when you switch the ignition off. It will go off automatically after a short time or when you start the engine. If you set the switch to position C with the ignition switched off, the courtesy lamp will illuminate. It will go off automatically after a short time to prevent your vehicle battery from losing charge. To switch it back on, switch the ignition on for a short time. Reading Lamps If you switch the ignition off, the reading lamps will go off automatically after some time to prevent your vehicle battery from discharging. To switch them back on, switch the ignition on for a short time. 52 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Windows and Mirrors Window Lock POWER WINDOWS WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves. When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It will illuminate when the rear window controls are locked. Bounce-Back (If Equipped) The window will stop automatically while closing. It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Press the switch to open the window. Lift the switch to close the window. Proceed as follows to override this protection feature when there is a resistance, for example in winter: One-Touch Down (If Equipped) Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window. 1. One-Touch Up (If Equipped) Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window. 53 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Close the window twice until it reaches the point of resistance and let it reverse. Windows and Mirrors 2. Close the window a third time to the point of resistance. The bounce-back feature is now disabled and you can close the window manually. The window will go past the point of resistance and you can close it fully. EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. See an authorized dealer as soon as possible if the window does not close after the third attempt. Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING The bounce-back feature remains turned off until you reset the memory. If you have disconnected the battery, you must reset the bounce-back memory separately for each window. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed. Release the switch. Lift the switch again for one more second. Press and hold the switch until the window is fully open. Release the switch. Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed. Open the window and then try to close it automatically. Reset and repeat the procedure if the window does not close automatically. Left-hand mirror B Off C Right-hand mirror Press the arrows to adjust the mirror. Electric Folding Mirrors Automatic Folding and Unfolding Note: If the mirrors have been folded using the manual fold button they can only be unfolded using the manual fold button. Accessory Delay (If Equipped) You can use the window switches for several minutes after you have switched the ignition off or until either front door is opened. 54 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A Windows and Mirrors Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors The mirrors will fold automatically when you lock your vehicle with the key, the remote control or a keyless entry system request. The mirrors will unfold when you unlock your vehicle with the key, the remote control, a keyless entry system request, the driver's interior door handle or starting the engine. Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. INTERIOR MIRROR Manual Folding and Unfolding WARNING Note: You can only fold the mirrors when the mirror switch is set to position B off. Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving. The electric folding mirrors operate with the ignition on. Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products. Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirror tilting and folding) for several minutes after you switch the ignition off. If you open a door you can no longer operate the mirrors. You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side. Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night. Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor. The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up. Press the downward arrow to fold or unfold the mirrors. If you press the switch again while the mirrors are moving, they will stop and reverse the direction of movement. Note: When the mirrors are operated often during a short period of time, the system may become inoperable for a period of time to prevent damage due to overheating. 55 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Windows and Mirrors Global Opening CHILDMINDER MIRROR To open all the windows: 1. Press and release the remote control unlock button. 2. Press and hold the remote control unlock button for at least three seconds. GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING You can also operate the power windows with the ignition off using the global opening and global closing function. Press the lock or unlock button to stop the opening function. Note: Global opening will only operate for a short period of time after you have unlocked your vehicle using the remote control. Global Closing Vehicles Without Keyless Entry Note: Global closing will only operate if you have set the memory correctly for each window. See Power Windows (page 53). WARNING Take care when using global closing. In an emergency, press the lock or unlock button immediately to stop. 56 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Windows and Mirrors To close all the windows, press and hold the driver’s door handle for at least three seconds. The bounce-back function is also on during global closing. To close all the windows, press and hold the remote control lock button for at least three seconds. Press the lock or unlock button to stop the closing function. The bounce-back function is also on during global closing. Vehicles With Keyless Entry WARNING Take care when using global closing. In an emergency, touch a door handle lock sensor to stop. Note: Global closing can be switched on using the driver’s door handle. Global opening and closing can also be switched on using the buttons on the passive key. 57 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Instrument Cluster GAUGES A Tachometer B Information display C Speedometer D Fuel gauge E Tripmeter reset button Fuel Gauge WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. The following warning lamps and indicators will illuminate when you switch the ignition on: • Anti-lock brake system. • Airbag. • Brake system. • Coolant temperature. • Doors ajar. • Engine. • Frost warning. • Ignition. 58 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Instrument Cluster • • • Oil pressure. Power steering. Stability control. If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the coolant level. See Engine Coolant Check (page 158). When a warning lamp or indicator does not illuminate once you have switched the ignition on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Cruise Control Indicator It will illuminate when you have set a speed using the cruise control system. See Using Cruise Control (page 117). Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Lamp If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Your vehicle will continue to have normal braking without Anti-lock brake system function. Direction Indicator Warning Lamp Flashes during operation. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing warns of a failed indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 162). Brake System Warning Lamp It will illuminate when you engage the parking brake and the ignition is on. Door Ajar Warning Lamp It will illuminate when you switch the ignition on and remains on if any door or the hood is open. WARNING Reduce your speed gradually and stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Use your brakes with care. Engine Warning Lamps Malfunction Indicator Lamp If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving, make sure the parking brake is disengaged. If the parking brake is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Powertrain Warning Lamp All Vehicles Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp If either lamp illuminates when the engine is running, this indicates a malfunction. The engine will continue to run but it may have limited power. If it flashes when you are driving, reduce the speed of your vehicle immediately. If it continues to flash, avoid heavy acceleration or deceleration. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. WARNING Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by a an authorized dealer immediately. 59 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Instrument Cluster Exterior Lamps On Indicator WARNING Have this checked immediately. It will illuminate when you switch the headlamp low beam or the side and tail lamps on. If both lamps illuminate together, stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so (continued use may cause reduced power and cause the engine to stop). Switch the ignition off and attempt to restart the engine. If the engine restarts have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. High Beam Indicator It will illuminate when you switch the headlamp high beam on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher. Ignition Warning Lamp Front Airbag Warning Lamp If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Front Fog Lamp Indicator Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp It will illuminate when you switch the front fog lamps on. If it illuminates, refuel as soon as possible. Frost Warning Lamp Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp WARNING It will illuminate when the tire pressure is low. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 178). Even if the temperature rises to above 39ºF (4ºC) there is no guarantee that the road is free of hazards caused by inclement weather. Message Center Indicator It will illuminate when the outside air temperature is 39ºF (4ºC) or below. It will illuminate when a new message is stored in the information display. See Information Messages (page 67). Glow Plug Indicator If it illuminates, wait until it extinguishes before starting. 60 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Instrument Cluster Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stability Control Indicator While driving, it flashes when the system is operating. After you switch the ignition on, if it does not illuminate or illuminates continuously while driving, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction, the system switches off. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WARNING Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 157). If you switch the electronic stability program off, the warning lamp will illuminate. The lamp will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. Power Steering Warning Lamp AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have full steering but will need to exert greater force on the steering wheel. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Automatic Transmission Sounds when you open the driver's door and do not move the transmission selector lever to position P. Rear Fog Lamp Indicator Key Outside Car It will illuminate when you switch the rear fog lamps on. Vehicles With Keyless System Sounds when you close the door, the engine is running and the system does not detect a passive key inside your vehicle. Safety Belt Minder Warning Lamp It will illuminate when a safety belt is not fastened. See Safety Belt Minder (page 22). Headlamps On Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Shift Indicator It will illuminate to inform you that shifting to a higher gear may give better fuel economy and lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminate during periods of high acceleration, when you brake or press the clutch pedal. Low Fuel A warning chime will sound when the remaining fuel is less than approximately 1.3 gallons (6 liters). The distance to empty displayed may vary depending on driving style and road conditions. 61 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Instrument Cluster Safety Belt Minder WARNINGS The safety belt minder remains in stand-by mode when the front safety belts have been fastened. It will sound if either safety belt is unfastened. Do not sit on top of a fastened safety belt to prevent the safety belt minder from coming on. The occupant protection system will only provide optimum protection when you use the safety belt properly. Sounds when your vehicle speed exceeds the pre-determined limit and the front safety belts are unfastened. The chime will stop after a period of time. 62 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Information Display Controls GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. You can control various systems on your vehicle using the information display controls on the audio unit. The information display will show the corresponding information. To use the controls: • Note: The information display will remain on for several minutes after you switch the ignition off. • Device List • The icon changes to show the current function in use. Press the up or down arrow button to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a submenu. Press the left arrow button to exit a submenu. Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display. Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. CD • Radio • Auxiliary input Menu Structure - Information Display You can access the menu using the information display control. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. SYNC-Media allows you to access the SYNC® features. 63 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays SYNC-Phone Dial a number Redial Phonebook Call history Speed Dial Text messaging BT Devices Phone settings Menu Ford EcoMode SYNC-Settings Bluetooth on Set defaults Master reset Install on SYNC System info Voice settings SYNC-Apps Navigation Route options Map display Assistance options Personal data Reset all settings Audio settings Adaptive volume Sound NAV audio mixing 64 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Menu DSP settings DSP equalizer Traffic News Alt. frequency RDS Regional DAB Service link Bluetooth Vehicle settings Traction Control Active City Stop Deflation detection Hill start assist Alarm system Rain sensor Powerfold mirrors Indicator Ambient light Chimes Clock settings Set time Set date 24-hour mode Display settings Measure Unit Language Dimming MyKey Create MyKey Traction control ESC 65 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Menu Active City Stop Speed limit Speed warning Volume limit Information Clear all MyKeys MyKey active Information System Check TRIP COMPUTER All active warnings will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Press the up or down arrow button to scroll through the list. CLOCK Type 1 Press the button to scroll through the displays. To adjust the clock, switch the ignition on and press buttons H or M on the information and entertainment display as necessary. You can reset the trip, average fuel consumption and average speed. Scroll to the required display, then press and hold the button. Type 2 The trip computer includes the following information displays: Note: Use the information display to adjust the clock. See General Information (page 63). Trip Odometer Registers the distance traveled of individual journeys. 66 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Distance to Empty PERSONALIZED SETTINGS Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary. Measure Units To swap between imperial and metric units, scroll to this display and press the OK button. Swapping between imperial and metric units will affect the following displays: • Distance to empty. • Average fuel consumption. • Instantaneous fuel consumption. • Average speed. Average Fuel Consumption Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset. Switching Chimes Off Instantaneous Fuel Consumption To switch chimes off, scroll to this display and press the OK button. Indicates the current fuel consumption. The following chimes can be switched off: • Warning messages. • Information messages. Stationary Fuel Consumption INFORMATION MESSAGES Indicates the current fuel consumption while stationary. Note: Depending on the options on your vehicle, not all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have. Average Speed Indicates the average speed calculated since the function was last reset. Distance Odometer Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time. Registers the total distance your vehicle has traveled. 67 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus. Some messages will be supplemented by a system specific symbol with a message indicator. The message indicator illuminates to supplement some messages. It will be red or amber depending on the severity of the message and will remain on until the cause of the message has been rectified. Airbag Message Airbag malfunction Service now Message indicator Action amber Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Message indicator Action Alarm Message Alarm triggered Check vehicle amber See Security (page 39). Interior scan deactivated amber See Security (page 39). Alarm system malfunction Next service - Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Message indicator Action Driver door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Driver's rear door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Passenger door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Passenger rear door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Doors Open Message 68 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Message Message indicator Action red Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. red Vehicle is moving. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 152). Boot open Bonnet open Driver door open amber Vehicle not moving. Close. Driver's rear door open amber Vehicle not moving. Close. Passenger door open amber Vehicle not moving. Close. Passenger rear door open amber Vehicle not moving. Close. Boot open amber Vehicle not moving. Close. Bonnet open amber Vehicle not moving. Close. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 152). Engine Message Engine preheating Message indicator Action amber See Starting a Diesel Engine (page 94). Message indicator Action red Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Engine Immobilizer Message Immobiliser malfunction Service now 69 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Keyless System Message Message indicator Action Key not detected amber See Keyless Entry (page 36). Key outside car amber See Keyless Entry (page 36). Key Battery low Replace battery amber See Remote Control (page 26). Turn ignition off Use POWER button amber See Keyless Starting (page 90). To start press brake - See Keyless Starting (page 90). To start press clutch - See Keyless Starting (page 90). Close boot or use spare key - See Keyless Entry (page 36). Steering lock engaged Turn steering wheel - See Steering Wheel Lock (page 92). Message indicator Action Lighting Message Left indicator malfunction Change bulb - See Changing a Bulb (page 162). Right indicator malfunction Change bulb - See Changing a Bulb (page 162). Maintenance Message Message indicator Action Brake fluid Level low Service now red See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). Brake system malfunction Stop safely red Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Engine oil pressure low red See Engine Oil Check (page 157). 70 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Message indicator Action Engine malfunction Service now amber Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Auto wiper/lights malfunction Next service amber Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. - Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Message Stop safely Engine oil change due Next service MyKey Message MyKey vehicle at top speed Message indicator Action Amber Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h). MyKey active Drive safely - Displays when MyKey is active. MyKey Speed limited to XX mph - Displays when starting your vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. MyKey Speed limited to XX km/h - Displays when starting your vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. MyKey Check speed Drive safely - Displays when MyKey is active. MyKey Vehicle near top speed - Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is reached. 71 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Message indicator Action Buckle up to unmute audio - Displays when a MyKey is in use and BeltMinder is activated. MyKey Park aid cannot be deactivated - Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated. MyKey ESC cannot be deactivated - Displays when programming a MyKey. Message Steering Message indicator Action Steering malfunction Service now red Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Steering malfunction Stop safely red Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. amber Full steering will be maintained but you will need to exert greater force on the steering wheel. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Message Power steering malfunction Service now 72 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Transmission Message indicator Action red Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. red The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Move the transmission selector lever to position N or P and apply the parking brake. Switch off the ignition until the transmission has cooled and the message disappears from the display. Vehicle not in Park Select P - See Automatic Transmission (page 104). See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 90). To start select N or P - See Automatic Transmission (page 104). See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 90). To start press brake - See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 90). To start select N - See Automatic Transmission (page 104). See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 90). Door open apply brake - See Automatic Transmission (page 104). See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 90). Message indicator Action ABS malfunction Service now amber Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. ESP malfunction Next service - Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. ESP off - See Using Stability Control (page 111). Message Transmission malfunction Service now Transmission overtemp. Stop safely Stability Control Message 73 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Information Displays Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Message indicator Action Check Tire pressures amber The pressure in one or more tires has dropped. Check as soon as possible. Tire pressure sys malfunction service required amber Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 74 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control Warming the Interior PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Direct the air toward your feet. In cold or humid weather conditions, direct some of the air toward the windshield and the door windows. Outside Air Keep the air intakes in front of the windshield free from obstruction (such as snow or leaves) to allow the climate control system to function effectively. Cooling the Interior Direct the air toward your face. Recirculated Air AIR VENTS WARNING Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to mist up. If the windows mist up, follow the settings for demisting the windshield. Center Air Vents The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. Outside air does not enter your vehicle. Heating Heating performance depends on the temperature of the engine coolant. Air Conditioning Note: The air conditioning operates only when the temperature is above 39°F (4°C). Note: When you use air conditioning, your vehicle uses more fuel. Side Air Vent The system directs air through the evaporator for cooling. The evaporator extracts humidity from the air to help keep the windows free of mist. The system directs the resulting condensation to the outside of your vehicle, which may cause a small pool to form under your vehicle. This is normal. General Information on Controlling the Interior Climate Fully close all the windows. 75 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL A Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the windshield may fog up. B On and off: Press the button to turn the system on and off. When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering your vehicle. C Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates and the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. D Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air distribution. E Heated windshield: Press the button to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. F Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature. If you select MAX A/C, the system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. G Heated rear window: Press the button to defog and clear the rear window of a thin covering of ice. 76 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control H Heated front seats: Press the button to turn the heated seats on. See Heated Seats (page 87). I Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL A Fan speed: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Rotate the control to select the desired fan speed. The setting is shown in the display. B On and off button: Press the button to switch the system on and off. C Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. D Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes. E Instrument panel: Press the button to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents. 77 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control F Windshield: Press the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. G Heated windshield: Press the button to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. H Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature. If you select MAX A/C, the system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. I Heated rear window: Press the button to defog and clear the rear window of a thin covering of ice. J Heated front seats: Press the button to turn the heated seats on. See Heated Seats (page 87). K Footwell: Press the button to distribute air through the footwell air vents. L Windshield defrosting and defogging: Press the button to distribute outside air through the windshield air vents. The heated windows and air conditioning will be automatically selected. The fan will be set to the highest speed and the temperature to high. When the air distribution is set in this position, you will be unable to select recirculated air or manually adjust the fan speed and temperature control. Press the AUTO button to return the system to auto mode. M AUTO: Press the button to select automatic operation. The system automatically controls the temperature, amount and distribution of the airflow to reach and maintain your previously selected temperature. N MAX A/C: Press the button to distribute maximum air conditioning through the instrument panel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. 78 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control Temperature Control Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. Manual Climate Control Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Increase the temperature and fan speed to improve clearing, if required. Automatic Climate Control You can set the temperature between 61°F (16°C) and 82°F (28°C) in steps of 1°F (0.5°C). In position low, the system will switch to permanent cooling. In position high, the system will switch to permanent heating. Note: Do not adjust the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold. The system automatically adjusts to the previously stored settings. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open. Note: If you select either position low or high, the system will not regulate a stable temperature. Note: At low ambient temperatures with AUTO selected, the air stream is directed toward the windshield and side windows for as long as the engine remains cold. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE Note: When the system is switched off, outside air is prevented from entering your vehicle. General Hints Note: When the system is in AUTO mode and the interior and exterior temperatures are high, the system automatically selects recirculated air to maximize cooling of the interior. When the selected air temperature is reached, the system automatically selects outside air. Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. Note: A small amount of air may be felt from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. Note: When you select windshield defrosting and defogging, the instrument panel and footwell level functions automatically switch off and air conditioning switches on. Outside air flows into your vehicle. Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. 79 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control Heating the Interior Quickly Vehicles With Manual Climate Control Vehicles With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting. Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting. Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting. 3 Adjust the air distribution control to the Press the footwell button to distribute footwell air vents position. air to the footwell air vents. Recommended Settings for Heating Vehicles With Manual Climate Control Vehicles With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting. Press the AUTO button. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings. Adjust the temperature control setting to the desired setting. 3 Adjust the air distribution control to the Close the instrument panel air vents. footwell and windshield air vents posi- Open the side air vents and direct them tion. toward the side windows. Cooling the Interior Quickly Vehicles With Manual Climate Control Vehicles With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting. Press the AUTO button. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A/C position. Adjust the temperature control setting to low. 3 Adjust the air distribution control to the instrument panel air vents position. 80 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control Recommended Settings for Cooling Vehicles With Manual Climate Control Vehicles With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting. Press the AUTO button. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 3 Adjust the air distribution control to the Open all instrument panel air vents and instrument panel air vents position. direct as desired. Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods During Extreme High Ambient Temperatures Vehicles With Manual Climate Control Vehicles With Automatic Climate Control 1 Apply the parking brake. Apply the parking brake. 2 Move the transmission selector lever to position P or neutral. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or neutral. 3 Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A/C position. Press the MAX A/C button. 4 Adjust the fan speed to the lowest speed setting. Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather Vehicles With Manual Climate Control Vehicles With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the air distribution control to the Press the windshield defrosting and instrument panel and footwell air vents defogging button. positions. 2 Press the A/C button. 3 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 81 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Climate Control Vehicles With Manual Climate Control 4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. 5 Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side windows. 6 Close the instrument panel vents. Vehicles With Automatic Climate Control Maximum Cooling Performance in Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions Heated Windshield 1. Heated Rear Window Adjust the temperature control to the lowest setting. 2. Press the A/C and recirculated air buttons. 3. Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting initially and then adjust it to suit the desired comfort level. Heated Exterior Mirrors Electric exterior mirrors have a heating element that will defrost or demist the mirror glass. They will switch on automatically when you switch the heated rear window on. HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS Heated Windows Use the heated windows to defrost or demist the windshield or rear window. Note: The heated windows operate only when the engine is running. 82 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Seats • SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNINGS Do not recline the seatback too far as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a collision. • Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far, can result in serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor. • • • Do not place objects higher than the seatback to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a collision or during heavy braking. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 inches (25 centimeters) between your breastbone and the air bag cover. Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. Adjusting the Head Restraints When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and air bags will provide optimum protection in the event of a collision. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head. We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees. 83 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Seats Rear Outer Head Restraint 1. Press button A to move the restraint rearward. 2. To move the restraint forward pull the headrest. 1. Press and hold the locking button. 2. Using a suitable implement release the retaining clip. Rear Center Head Restraint Removing the Head Restraint Press the locking buttons and remove the head restraint. 1. Press and hold the locking button. 2. Using a suitable implement release the retaining clip. 84 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Seats Adjusting the Height of the Driver’s Seat MANUAL SEATS WARNINGS Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seatback to its original position. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a collision. Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged in its catch. Recline Adjustment Moving the Seat Backward and Forward Folding the Passenger's Seat Forward WARNINGS Do not drive with the passenger's seat folded forwards if the rear or center seat behind is occupied. Adjusting the Lumbar Support Do not drive with items on the folded seatback. When folding the passenger's seat forward, make sure that you keep clear of the seatback and seat frame. 85 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Seats 1. Push the locking lever 2. Fold the seat forward. Make sure that the seatback is in the folded position and securely latched. 3. Push the locking lever to return the seatback to the vertical position. Make sure that the seatback is securely latched in position. 1. Press the unlock buttons down and hold them there. 2. Push the seatback forward. As the rear seatback lowers the seat cushion will also lower. Unfolding the Seatback WARNINGS When folding the seatbacks up, make sure that the belts are visible to an occupant and not caught behind the seat. REAR SEATS Folding the Seatback WARNINGS When folding the seatbacks down, take care not to get your fingers caught between the seatback and seat frame. Make sure that the seats and the seatbacks are secure and fully engaged in their catches. Do not attempt to fold the rear seat cushion forward. Lower the head restraints. See Head Restraints (page 83). 86 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Seats HEATED SEATS FRONT SEAT ARMREST WARNING People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. • Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so could drain your vehicle battery. For item location: See Climate Control (page 75). The heated seat will only operate with the ignition switched on. The maximum temperature is reached after five or six minutes. It is regulated thermostatically. The heated seat will remain on until either the heated seat switch or the ignition is switched off. 87 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point Location Power points may be found: • on the center console • on the rear of the center console. WARNING Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. CIGAR LIGHTER Note: Do not hold the cigar lighter element pressed in. Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 20 amps. Note: If you use the socket when the engine is not running, the battery may lose charge. Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 20 amps. After you switch the ignition off the power supply will only work for a maximum of 30 minutes. Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Note: After you switch the ignition off the power supply will only work for a maximum of 30 minutes. Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Note: Use only Ford accessory connectors or connectors specified for use with SAE standard sockets. Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or a fuse may blow. Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigar lighter element. Note: Incorrect use of the power point can cause damage not covered by your warranty. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. Press the element in to use the cigar lighter. It will pop out automatically. To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when your vehicle is parked for extended periods. 88 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Storage Compartments CUP HOLDERS WARNING Do not place hot drinks in the cup holders when your vehicle is moving. GLASSES HOLDER 89 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. 0(off) - The ignition is off. Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. I (accessory) - Allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long to avoid your vehicle battery losing charge. II (on) - All electrical circuits operational. Warning lamps and indicators are illuminated. If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. KEYLESS STARTING WARNINGS The system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cell phones. The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine. Always check that the steering wheel lock is deactivated before attempting to move your vehicle. Note: The ignition will automatically switch off when you leave your vehicle unattended. This is to prevent your vehicle battery running out of charge. 90 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Starting and Stopping the Engine Starting a Diesel Engine Note: A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine. Note: Engine cranking will not commence until the engine glow plug indicator has extinguished. This may take several seconds in extremely cold conditions. Ignition On Press the button once. It is located on the instrument panel near the steering wheel. All electrical circuits and accessories are operational and the warning lamps and indicators will illuminate. Failure to Start All Vehicles The system will not function if: • • The key frequencies are jammed. The key battery has no charge. If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the following. Starting With Manual Transmission Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the engine is starting will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. 1. Hold the key next to the steering column exactly as shown. 2. With the key in this position you can use the button to switch the ignition on and start your engine. 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Briefly press the button. Starting With Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the engine is starting will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. A message will be shown in the display. Note: Releasing the brake pedal while the engine is starting will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal. 3. Briefly press the button. If the engine does not crank when the clutch pedal has been fully depressed and the button is pressed: 1. Fully depress both the clutch and brake pedals. 2. Press the button until the engine starts. 91 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Starting and Stopping the Engine Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary STEERING WHEEL LOCK VEHICLES WITHOUT: KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START/PUSH BUTTON START Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators will be switched off. WARNING Manual Transmission Always check that the steering is unlocked before attempting to move your vehicle. Press the button. Automatic Transmission 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. 2. Press the button. To lock the steering wheel: 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly to engage the lock. Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving To unlock the steering wheel: 1. Insert the key in the ignition switch. 2. Turn the key to position I. WARNING Switching off the engine when your vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. With the ignition switched off some electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. Note: You may need to rotate the steering wheel slightly to assist unlocking if there is a steering wheel load applied. STEERING WHEEL LOCK VEHICLES WITH: KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START/PUSH BUTTON START 1. Press and hold the button for at least one second or press it three times within two seconds. 2. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 3. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever to position P or N and switch the ignition off. Your vehicle has an electronically controlled steering wheel lock that operates automatically. The system will lock the steering wheel after a short period of time once you have parked your vehicle and the passive key is outside your vehicle, or when you lock your vehicle. Note: The system will not lock the steering wheel when the ignition is on or while your vehicle is moving. 92 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Starting and Stopping the Engine Unlocking the Steering Wheel Switch the ignition on to unlock the steering wheel. If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below -13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal to the mid-way point of its travel and try again. Note: You may have to rotate the steering wheel slightly to assist unlocking. Flooded Engine Vehicles with Manual Transmission STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 3. Start the engine. Note: You can only operate the starter for a limited period of time, for example 10 seconds. The number of start attempts is limited to approximately six. If you exceed this limit, the system will not allow you to try again until a period of time has elapsed, for example 30 minutes. Vehicles with Automatic Transmission 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 3. Start the engine. Cold or Hot Engine Vehicles with Manual Transmission All Vehicles Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. If the engine does not start, repeat the cold or hot engine procedure. Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the engine is starting will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. Engine Idle Speed after Starting 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Start the engine. The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting is optimized to minimize vehicle emissions and maximize cabin comfort and fuel economy. Vehicles with Automatic Transmission Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. The idle speed will vary depending on certain factors. These include vehicle component and ambient temperatures as well as electrical and climate system demands. 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 2. Start the engine. All Vehicles Failure to Start If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, wait for a short period and try again. Vehicles with Manual Transmission If the engine does not crank when the clutch pedal has been fully depressed and the ignition key is turned to position III. If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow the flooded engine procedure. 1. 93 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fully depress the clutch and brake pedals. Starting and Stopping the Engine 2. Turn the key to position III until the engine has started. Failure to Start STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE If the engine does not crank when the clutch pedal has been fully depressed and the ignition key is turned to position III. Vehicles With Manual Transmission Cold or Hot Engine 1. Fully depress the clutch and brake pedals. 2. Turn the key to position III until the engine has started. All Vehicles Note: When the temperature is below 5°F (-15°C), you may need to crank the engine for up to 10 seconds. Note: You can only operate the starter for a limited period of time. DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER Note: After a limited number of attempts to start your engine, the system will not allow you to try again until a period of time has elapsed, for example 30 minutes. The filter forms part of the emissions reduction system on your vehicle. It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the exhaust gas. Switch the ignition on and wait until the glow plug indicator goes off. Regeneration WARNINGS Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after regeneration and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. Vehicles With Manual Transmission Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the engine is starting will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Start the engine. Avoid running out of fuel. Vehicles With Automatic Transmission Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic odor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to the high temperatures reached during regeneration and is normal. Note: Releasing the brake pedal while the engine is starting will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal. 3. Start the engine. Note: After you have switched your engine off the fans may continue to run for a short period of time. 94 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Starting and Stopping the Engine A normal filter requires periodic replacement. The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle requires periodic regeneration to maintain its correct function. Your vehicle will carry out this process automatically. Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until the engine has reached idle speed and then switch it off. If your journeys meet one of the following conditions: • You drive only short distances. • You frequently switch the ignition on and off. • Your journeys contain a high level of acceleration and deceleration. You must carry out occasional trips with the following conditions to assist the regeneration process: • Drive your vehicle in more favorable conditions, which you will find at higher vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a main road or freeway for a minimum of 20 minutes. This drive may include short stops that will not affect the regeneration process. • Avoid prolonged idling and always observe speed limits and road conditions. • Do not switch the ignition off. • Select a suitable gear to ideally maintain engine speed between 1500 and 3000 RPM. SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE Vehicles With a Turbocharger WARNING Do not switch the engine off when it is running at high speed. If you do, the turbocharger will continue running after the engine oil pressure has dropped to zero. This will lead to premature turbocharger bearing wear. 95 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Unique Driving Characteristics AUTO-START-STOP Note: For vehicles with start-stop the battery requirement is different. It must be replaced by one of exactly the same specification as the original. Note: When the start-stop indicator flashes amber, move the transmission selector lever to neutral or depress the clutch pedal. Note: If the system detects a malfunction, it will switch off. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. The system reduces fuel consumption and CO2 emissions by shutting down the engine when your vehicle is idling, for example at traffic lights. The engine will automatically restart when you press the clutch pedal or when required by a vehicle system, for example to recharge the battery. Note: When you switch the system off, the switch will illuminate. Note: The system automatically turns on every time you switch the ignition on. To switch the system off, press the switch in the instrument panel. The system will only be switched off for the current ignition cycle. To turn it on, press the switch again. For item location: See At a Glance (page 9). To obtain maximum benefit from the system, move the transmission selector lever to neutral and release the clutch pedal during any stop of longer than three seconds. To Stop the Engine Using Start-Stop 1. Stop your vehicle. 2. Move the transmission selector lever to neutral. 3. Release the clutch pedal. 4. Release the accelerator pedal. WARNINGS The engine may restart automatically if required by the system. Switch the ignition off before opening the hood or carrying out any maintenance. The system may not shut down the engine under certain conditions, for example: • To maintain the interior climate. • Low battery voltage. • The outside temperature is too low or too high. • The driver's door has been opened. • Low engine operating temperature. • Low brake system vacuum. • If a road speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) has not been exceeded. • The driver's safety belt has not been fastened. Always switch the ignition off before leaving your vehicle, as the system may have shut down the engine but the ignition will still be live. Note: The system only operates when the engine is warm and the outside temperature is between 32°F (0°C) and 86°F (30°C). Note: If you stall the engine, and then depress the clutch pedal within a short period of time, the system will automatically restart the engine. Note: The start-stop indicator will illuminate green when the engine shuts down. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 58). 96 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Unique Driving Characteristics To Re-Start the Engine Note: The transmission selector lever must be in neutral. Depress the clutch pedal. The system may automatically restart the engine under certain conditions, for example: • Low battery voltage. • To maintain the interior climate. 97 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuel and Refueling • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. • The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. • Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. • Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. Always turn off the vehicle before refueling. 98 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. Fuel and Refueling FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE WARNINGS Use diesel that meets the specification defined by EN 590 or the relevant national specification. WARNINGS Do not mix gasoline with oil, diesel or other liquids. This could cause a chemical reaction. Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel. Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with additives containing other metallic compounds (e.g. manganese-based). They could damage the emission system. Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives or other engine treatments for normal vehicle use. Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives to prevent fuel waxing. Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel. Long-Term Storage Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives or other engine treatments for normal vehicle use. Most diesel fuels contain biodiesel. We recommend that you fill the fuel tank with fuel that does not contain biodiesel if you intend to store your vehicle for more than two months. Alternatively, we recommend that you seek advice from your dealer. Use minimum 95 octane unleaded gasoline that meets the specification defined by EN 228 or the equivalent national specification. RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanol blends up to 10% (E5 and E10). Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components. Long-Term Storage Most gasoline contains ethanol. We recommend that you fill the fuel tank with fuel that does not contain ethanol if you intend to store your vehicle for more than two months. Alternatively, we recommend that you seek advice from an authorized dealer. If you have run out of fuel: • FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL • WARNINGS Do not mix diesel with oil, gasoline or other liquids. This could cause a chemical reaction. Do not add kerosene, paraffin or gasoline to diesel. This could cause damage to the fuel system. 99 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time will be longer than usual. Normally, adding 1 gallon (4.6 liters) of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If your vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more fuel may be required. Fuel and Refueling Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container 1. Locate the plastic funnel in the glove box. 2. Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel system. 3. Fill your vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container. 4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel. WARNINGS Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the capless fuel system. This could damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal injury. Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. CATALYTIC CONVERTER WARNING Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during use, and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. When filling your vehicle's fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the funnel included with your vehicle. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • • • • Place approved fuel container on the ground. Do not fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area). Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. Do not use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. Driving with a Catalytic Converter WARNINGS Avoid running out of fuel. Do not crank the engine for long periods. Do not run the engine when a spark plug lead is disconnected. Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 132). Do not switch the ignition off when driving. 100 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuel and Refueling REFUELING WARNINGS Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with the incorrect fuel. This could damage the engine. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not use any kind of flames or heat near the fuel system. The fuel system is under pressure. There is a risk of injury if the fuel system is leaking. 1. If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel filler flap briefly from a distance not less than 8 inches (200 millimeters). Press the flap to open it. Open the flap fully until it engages. We recommend that you wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pipe nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. Stop refueling after the fuel nozzle stops the second time. Additional fuel will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank which could lead to fuel overflowing. Fuel spillage could be hazardous to other road users. Do not remove the nozzle from its fully inserted position during the entire refueling process. Note: It is not possible to fully open the sliding door when the fuel filler flap is open. Note: When you insert the correct size fuel nozzle, a spring loaded inhibitor will open. This helps to avoid filling up with the wrong fuel. Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler cap. 2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to and including the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel pipe opening. 101 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuel and Refueling FUEL CONSUMPTION Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. The CO2 and fuel consumption figures are derived from laboratory tests according to Regulation (EC) 715/2007 and subsequent amendments are carried out by all vehicle manufacturers. 3. Hold the nozzle in position B during refilling. Holding the nozzle in position A may affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel nozzle before the fuel tank is full. They are intended as a comparison between makes and models of vehicles. They are not intended to represent the real world fuel consumption you may get from your vehicle. Real world fuel consumption is governed by many factors including: driving style, high speed driving, stop-start driving, air conditioning usage, the accessories fitted, payload, towing, etc. The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. Filling the Tank 4. Operate the nozzle within the area shown. For consistent results when refueling: • • • 5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it. Results are most accurate when the refueling method is consistent. 102 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Switch the ignition off before refueling. An inaccurate reading results if you leave the engine running. Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high) each time the tank is filled. Allow no more than two automatic shut-offs when refueling. Fuel and Refueling Calculating Fuel Economy 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. 5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used (For Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled). Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 km) of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period). A more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 - 3000 miles (3200 - 4800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy. Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or freeway). This provides an accurate estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy. 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading. 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added. 3. After at least three to five tank fill ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Fuel Consumption Figures Urban Extra-Urban Combined CO2 Emissions l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) g/km 6.6 (42.8) 4.3 (65.7) 5.1 (55.4) 119 1.0L EcoBoost (74kW/100PS) with startstop 6 (47.1) 4.2 (67.3) 4.9 (57.6) 114 1.0L EcoBoost (90kW/120PS) 6 (47.1) 4.2 (67.3) 4.9 (57.6) 114 1.4L Duratec-16V 7.9 (35.8) 4.9 (57.6) 6 (47.1) 139 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT 8.6 (32.8) 5.1 (55.4) 6.4 (44.1) 149 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi 4.7 (60.1) 3.6 (78.4) 4 (70.6) 104 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi 4.8 (58.9) 3.8 (74.3) 4.1 (68.9) 109 Variant 1.0L EcoBoost (74kW/100PS) without start-stop 103 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Transmission Selector Lever Positions MANUAL TRANSMISSION Selecting Reverse Gear Do not engage reverse gear when your vehicle is moving. This can cause damage to the transmission. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure you move the transmission selector lever to position P. Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than three seconds will limit engine rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury. Note: The system performs a series of checks when you switch the ignition off. You may hear a slight clicking sound. This is normal. P Park R Reverse N Neutral D Drive S Sport mode and manual shifting + Manual shift up - Manual shift down WARNING Apply the brakes before moving the transmission selector lever and keep them applied until you are ready to move off. Press the button on the transmission selector lever to change to each position. The transmission selector lever position will be shown in the information display. P (Park) WARNINGS Move the transmission selector lever to park only when your vehicle is stationary. 104 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Transmission Select drive to shift automatically through the forward gears. WARNINGS Apply the parking brake and move the transmission selector lever to park before leaving your vehicle. Make sure that the transmission selector lever is latched in position. The transmission will select the appropriate gear for optimum performance based on ambient temperature, road gradient, vehicle load and your input. Sport Mode and Manual Shifting Note: An audible warning will sound if you open the driver's door and you have not moved the transmission selector lever to park. Sport Mode Note: In sport mode the transmission operates as normal but gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds. In this position, power is not transmitted to the drive wheels and the transmission is locked. You can start the engine with the transmission selector lever in this position. Note: In sport mode S will be shown in the information display. Switch on sport mode by moving the transmission selector lever to position S. Sport mode will remain on until either you shift manually up or down the gears using + and - or move the transmission selector lever to position D. R (Reverse) WARNINGS Move the transmission selector lever to reverse only when your vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle speed. Manual Shifting Always come to a complete stop before shifting the transmission selector lever out of reverse. WARNINGS Do not hold the buttons permanently in - or +. Move the transmission selector lever to reverse to allow your vehicle to move backward. The transmission will automatically downshift when the engine speed is too low. N (Neutral) Press the - button to shift down and press the + button to shift up. In this position, power is not transmitted to the drive wheels but the transmission is not locked. You can start the engine with the transmission selector lever in this position. Gears may be skipped by pressing the buttons repeatedly at short intervals. Manual mode also provides a kickdown function. See Kickdown. D (Drive) Note: A shift will occur only when your vehicle speed and the engine speed are appropriate. Note: You may temporarily override the current gear selected using the + and buttons. 105 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Transmission Hints on Driving With an Automatic Transmission Emergency Park Position Release Lever WARNING WARNINGS Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working. Do not idle the engine for long periods of time in drive with the brakes applied. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working correctly. See an authorized dealer. Moving Off 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Release the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal. Use the lever to move the transmission selector lever from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle battery has no charge. Stopping 1. Release the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Move the transmission selector lever to N or P. Kickdown Press the accelerator pedal fully with the transmission selector lever in the drive position to select the next lowest gear for optimum performance. Release the accelerator pedal when you no longer require kickdown. 1. Apply the parking brake and switch the ignition off before performing this procedure. 2. Remove the retaining screw. 3. Remove the center console side panel. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 106 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Transmission The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. When the system is active, your vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space). Note: The lever is pink. 4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a suitable tool rotate the lever forward while pulling the transmission selector lever out of the park position and into the neutral position. Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used. The system will activate automatically on any slope which can result in significant vehicle rollback. Using Hill Start Assist 1. Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed. 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system will be activated automatically. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released automatically. HILL START ASSIST WARNINGS The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake and move the transmission selector lever into position P (Park). You must remain in your vehicle once you have activated the system. During all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Switching the System On and Off Note: The system can only be switched on and off for manual transmissions. If the engine is revved excessively, or if a malfunction is detected, the system will be deactivated. Note: Once you have switched off the system, it will remain off until you switch it on again. 107 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Transmission Your vehicle comes with the system already enabled. If desired, you can disable the feature: See General Information (page 63). 108 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Brakes GENERAL INFORMATION HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES WARNING Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when: • you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you • your vehicle is hydroplaning • you take corners too fast • the road surface is poor. Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels (page 173). PARKING BRAKE Vehicles With Automatic Transmission Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and leave your vehicle with the transmission selector lever in position P. Emergency Brake Assist Emergency brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Emergency brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations. Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing uphill move the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the steering wheel away from the curb. Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing downhill move the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the steering wheel toward the curb. Anti-lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control and vehicle stability during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. Vehicles With Manual Transmission Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing uphill select first gear and turn the steering wheel away from the curb. 109 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Brakes Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing downhill select reverse gear and turn the steering wheel toward the curb. All Vehicles Note: Do not press the release button while pulling the lever up. To apply the parking brake: 1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its fullest extent. To release the parking brake: 1. Press the brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the lever up slightly. 3. Press the release button and push the lever down. 110 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Stability Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Stability Control Warning Lamp Electronic Stability Program While driving, it flashes when the system is operating. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 58). WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death. USING STABILITY CONTROL Note: The system automatically switches on every time you switch the ignition on. You can switch the system on and off using the information display. See General Information (page 63). A Without ESP B With ESP The system supports stability when your vehicle starts to slide away from your intended path. The system performs this by braking individual wheels and reducing engine torque as required. The system also provides an enhanced traction control function by reducing engine torque if the wheels spin when you accelerate. This improves your ability to pull away on slippery roads or loose surfaces, and improves comfort by limiting wheel spin in hairpin bends. 111 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Parking Aids Note: The outer sensors may detect the side walls of a garage. If the distance between the outer sensors and the side wall remains constant for three seconds, the alert will turn off. As you continue the inner sensors will detect objects directly behind your vehicle. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. If your vehicles has a non-Ford approved trailer tow module the system may not correctly detect objects. PARKING AID WARNINGS Sensing is only an aid to detect some objects when moving forward or backward at low speeds. Traffic control systems, inclement weather or an external motor and fan can affect the sensors; this may include reduced performance or false activation. To help avoid personal injury you must read and understand the limitations of the system detailed in this section. The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections. The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves. The system does not detect objects that are moving away from your vehicle. They will only be detected shortly after they start to move toward your vehicle. The parking aid system may not prevent contact with small or moving objects that are close to the ground. The parking aid system gives an audible warning when it detects a large object helping to avoid damage to your vehicle. To help avoid personal injury you must take care when using the parking aid system. Take particular care when reversing with a tow ball arm or a rear fitted accessory. For example, a bicycle carrier. The rear parking aid will only indicate the approximate distance from the rear bumper to an object. If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the sensors briefly from a distance not less than eight inches (20 centimeters). Note: Some add-on equipment can cause reduced performance or false activation. For example, large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks. Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, the system is turned off automatically when trailer lamps (or lighting boards) are connected to the 13-pin socket through a Ford approved trailer tow module. Note: The parking aid system sensors must be kept clean and free from snow or ice to avoid reduced performance or false activation. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice or snow. Do not clean with sharp objects. Note: If the parking aid sensors are misaligned due to vehicle bumper damage it will cause reduced performance or false activation. Note: The system may emit false alerts if it detects a signal using the same frequency as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully loaded. 112 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Parking Aids The parking aid system gives an audible warning and reduces the radio volume when it detects a large object within a limited range of your vehicle’s bumpers. The system detects large objects when you move the transmission selector lever to R (reverse): • and your vehicle is moving toward the object at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) • and your vehicle is not moving but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) • and your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Note: When the parking aid system no longer detects a large object the radio volume will return to the previous level. Rear Sensing System The rear parking aid sensors turn on automatically when you move the transmission selector lever to R (reverse) and your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Moving your vehicle closer to a large object will increase the audible warning repeat rate. When the object is less than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the center of your vehicle’s rear bumper the audible warning will sound continuously. If the object is more than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the side of your vehicle’s rear bumper the audible warning will sound for three seconds. If the object is less than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the side of your vehicle’s rear bumper the audible warning will sound continuously. A Move the transmission selector lever from R (reverse) or press the parking aid button to switch the system off. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display and does not allow you to switch the system on. Front and Rear Sensing System The front and rear parking aid sensors turn on automatically when you move the transmission selector lever to R (reverse), D (drive) or L (low) and your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The rear parking aid sensor coverage area is up to 72 inches (183 centimeters) from the center of your vehicle’s rear bumper. There is a decreased coverage area at the outer corners. 113 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Parking Aids • • A The front parking aid sensor coverage area is up to 31 inches (80 centimeters) from the center of your vehicle’s front bumper and up to 14 inches (35 centimeters) to the side of your vehicle’s front bumper. The rear parking aid sensor coverage area is up to 72 inches (183 centimeters) from the center of your vehicle’s rear bumper. There is a decreased coverage area at the outer corners. • Move the transmission selector lever from R (reverse), D (drive), L (low) or move away from large objects as you drive off, or press the parking aid button to switch the system off. For item location: See At a Glance (page 9). If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display and does not allow you to switch the system on. Audible warnings will sound when large objects are within the sensor coverage areas of either bumper in the following manner: • You will hear a high-pitched tone from the front audio system speakers when large objects are within the sensor coverage area of your vehicle’s front bumper. Moving your vehicle closer to a large object will increase the audible warning repeat rate. • You will hear a lower-pitched tone from the rear audio system speakers when large objects are within the sensor coverage area of your vehicle’s rear bumper. Moving your vehicle closer to a large object will increase the audible warning repeat rate. REAR VIEW CAMERA WARNINGS The operation of the camera may vary depending on the ambient temperature, vehicle and road conditions. The distances shown in the display may differ from the actual distance. 114 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 The parking aid system prioritises audible warnings based on large objects that are the closest to your vehicle’s front or rear bumper. For example, if an object is 24 inches (60 centimeters) from your vehicle’s front bumper and at the same time, an object is only 16 inches (40 centimeters) from your vehicle’s rear bumper, you will hear the lower-pitched tone from the rear audio system speakers. You will hear an alternating audible warning from the front and rear audio system speakers if large objects are less than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from your vehicle’s front and rear bumpers. If the object is more than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the side of your vehicle’s bumper area the audible warning will sound for three seconds. If the object is less than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the side of your vehicle’s bumper area the audible warning will sound continuously. Parking Aids Using the Display WARNINGS Do not place objects in front of the camera. WARNINGS Obstacles above the camera position will not be shown. Inspect the area behind your vehicle if necessary. The camera is located on the liftgate near the handle. Marks are for general guidance only, and are calculated for vehicles in maximum load conditions on an even road surface. The lines show the distance from the outer edge of the front tire plus two inches (51 millimeters) and the rear bumper. Switching the Rear View Camera On WARNING The camera may not detect objects that are close to your vehicle. Switch the ignition and the audio unit on. Press the parking aid switch in the instrument panel or move the transmission selector lever to position R (reverse). The image is displayed on the screen. The lamp in the switch illuminates when the system is switched on. The camera may not operate correctly in the following conditions: • Dark areas. • Intense light. • If the ambient temperature increases or decreases rapidly. • If the camera is wet, for example in rain or high humidity. • If the camera's view is obstructed, for example by mud. 115 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Parking Aids C Green - 24 - 35 inches (0.6 - 0.9 meter) D Black - center line of the projected vehicle path Note: The green line is extended from 35 inches (0.9 meter) up to a distance of 126 inches (3.2 meters). Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lines on the screen are not shown. The camera will show your vehicle direction and not the trailer. Switching the Rear View Camera Off Note: The system will automatically switch off once your vehicle speed has reached approximately 7 mph (12 km/h). Press the parking aid switch in the instrument panel. For item location: See At a Glance (page 9). Vehicles with Parking Aid The display will additionally show a colored distance bar. This guide indicates the distance from the rear bumper to the detected obstacle. These are color coded as follows: • Green - 24 - 71 inches (0.6 to 1.8 meters). • Amber - 12 - 24 inches (0.3 to 0.6 meter). • Red - 12 inches (0.3 meter) or less. A Red - up to 12 inches (0.3 meter) B Amber - 12 - 24 inches (0.3 - 0.6 meter) 116 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Cruise Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Cruise control allows you to control your speed using the switches on the steering wheel. You can use cruise control when you exceed approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The cruise controls are located on the steering wheel. USING CRUISE CONTROL Switching Cruise Control On WARNINGS Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on winding roads or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Press and release ON. When you are going downhill, your speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes. Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set speed. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. 1. Accelerate to the desired speed. 2. Press and release SET+. 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The indicator will display in the instrument cluster. Setting a Speed Changing the Set Speed • Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill. • • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. Press and release SET+ or SET-. The set speed will change in approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press and release SET+. Canceling the Set Speed Press and release CAN, or tap the brake pedal. The set speed will not be erased. 117 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed Press and release RES. Switching Cruise Control Off Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off. Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off. 118 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Driving Aids ACTIVE CITY STOP WARNINGS If you install a windshield not approved by us, the system may not function correctly. General Information WARNINGS The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. If the engine stops after the system has been switched on, the hazard warning flashers will turn on. The system may not function when driving around sharp curves. At all times you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required. Note: Keep the windshield free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects, snow or ice. Never look directly into the sensor with any type of object. There is a risk of eye injury. Note: Keep the hood free of ice and snow, otherwise the system may not function correctly. If the sensor becomes blocked the system may not function. A sensor is mounted behind the interior rear view mirror. It continuously monitors conditions to decide when to intervene. To achieve full system performance, you must bed the braking system in. See Breaking-In (page 130). The system is designed to help you reduce low speed collisions into the rear of another vehicle. It will also help you reduce the impact damage or potentially avoid the collision completely. The system performance may vary depending on your vehicle and road conditions. The system will not react to vehicles driving in a different direction. The system will not react to bicycles, motorcycles, people or animals. The system operates at speeds below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) by applying the brakes when the sensor detects that a collision is likely. When the ignition is on the sensor will constantly transmit a laser beam. You must depress the brake pedal to obtain full braking force. When the system is braking or has automatically applied the brakes, a message will be shown in the information display. The system will not operate during harsh acceleration and steering. In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow, spray and ice can all influence the sensor. Using Active City Stop Switching the System Off and On Do not carry out windshield repairs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor. Note: The system automatically turns on every time you switch the ignition on. 119 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Driving Aids Laser Sensor Information In certain situations it is advisable to disable the system, for example: • Driving off road when objects may cover the windshield. • Driving through a car wash facility. You can switch the system off and on using the information display. See General Information (page 63). Active City Stop Relearning Procedure Note: When you disconnect the battery, the system will go through a relearning procedure. During this time the system will not be available. WARNINGS Invisible laser radiation. Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers). Class 1M laser product. You must drive your vehicle above 31mph (50 km/h) in a straight line for the procedure to complete. This procedure may take several minutes. IEC 60825-1: 1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviation pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001. Item Specification Max average power 45mW Pulse duration 33ns Wavelength 905nm 120 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Load Carrying GENERAL INFORMATION REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE WARNINGS Use load securing straps to an approved standard, e.g. DIN. Adjustable Load Floor Make sure that you secure all loose items properly. Place luggage and other loads as low and as far forward as possible within the luggage or loadspace. Do not drive with the liftgate or rear door open. Exhaust fumes may enter your vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum front and rear axle loads for your vehicle. See Vehicle Identification Plate (page 186). Vehicles with the standard size spare tire can adjust the load floor to two positions. The load floor can be placed on either the high or the low position on shelves located at the rear of the luggage compartment trim. Do not allow items to contact the rear windows. Note: When loading long objects in to your vehicle, for example pipes, timber or furniture be careful not to damage the interior trim. LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS 121 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Load Carrying Removing the Cover CARGO NETS Installing and Removing the Net Installing the Net DOG GUARD WARNING Keep a small distance between the dog guard and the rear seats. 1. Raise the rear outer head restraints. See Head Restraints (page 83). 2. Attach the top securing clips to the head restraint guides. 3. Attach the bottom securing clips to the bottom anchor points. Removing the Net 1. Raise the rear outer head restraints. See Head Restraints (page 83). 2. Remove the top and bottom securing clips. 1. LUGGAGE COVERS WARNING Do not place objects on the luggage cover. 122 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Attach the dog guard to the upper and lower anchor points. Tighten the handwheels. Load Carrying 123 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Towing • TOWING A TRAILER WARNINGS Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h). This could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. The rear tire pressures must be increased by 3 psi (0.2 bar) above specification. Do not exceed the maximum pressure stated on the tire sidewall. This could cause serious personal injury. See Wheels and Tires (page 174). • • Do not exceed the maximum gross train weight stated on your vehicle identification plate. This could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. See Vehicle Identification Plate (page 186). • • Do not exceed the maximum permissible trailer nose weight (vertical weight on the tow ball) as stated in the vehicle specification chart. This could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. See Capacities and Specifications (page 186). Note: The maximum permissible trailer nose weight on the trailer identification plate is the trailer manufacturer’s testing value. The vehicle maximum permissible trailer nose weight may be lower. The stability of your vehicle to trailer combination is very much dependent on the quality of the trailer. The anti-lock braking system does not control the overrun brake on the trailer. This could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. Towing a trailer changes the vehicle handling characteristics and increases stopping distances. Adapt your speed and driving behavior to the load of the trailer. When towing a trailer: • • The gross train weight stated on the vehicle identification plate applies for road gradients up to 12% and altitudes up to 3281 feet (1000 meters) when towing a trailer. In mountainous regions the engine performance decreases due to lower air density with increasing altitude. In high altitude regions above 3281feet (1000 metres), the stipulated maximum permitted gross train weight must be reduced by 10% for every extra 3281 feet (1000 metres). Obey country specific regulations for towing a trailer. Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h) even if a country allows higher speeds under certain conditions. 124 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Place loads as low as possible and central to the axle of your trailer. If you are towing with an unladen vehicle, the load in your trailer should be placed toward the nose, within the maximum nose load, as this gives the best stability. See Capacities and Specifications (page 186). The trailer nose weight (vertical weight on the tow ball), is essential for the driving stability of your vehicle and trailer. The vertical weight on the tow ball should be at least 4% of the trailer weight and not exceed the maximum permissable weight. See Capacities and Specifications (page 186). Reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows any sign of swaying. Use a low gear when descending a steep downhill gradient. Towing Unlocking the Tow Ball Arm Mechanism Note: Not all vehicles are suitable or approved to have tow bars fitted. See an authorized dealer for further information. Trailer Lighting The electrical system on your vehicle is not suitable for towing trailers with LED lamps. TOW BALL WARNINGS When not in use, always transport the tow ball arm securely fastened in the luggage compartment. 1. Remove the protecting cap. 2. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to unlock. 3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the handwheel out and turn it clockwise until it clicks. Note: The red mark on the handwheel must align with the green mark on the tow ball. Take special care when fitting the tow ball arm as the safety of your vehicle and the trailer depends on this. Do not use any tools for mounting or dismounting the tow ball arm. Do not modify the trailer coupling. 4. Release the handwheel. The tow ball arm is unlocked. Do not disassemble or repair the tow ball arm. Inserting the Tow Ball Arm WARNING The tow ball arm may only be inserted when completely unlocked. A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball arm seat are provided under the rear bumper. Turn the trailer socket down through 90 degrees until it engages in the end position. 125 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Towing Before starting your journey, make sure that the tow ball arm is correctly locked. Check that: • • • • Note: Pull out the plug. Removing the Tow Ball Arm 1. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and press it upwards until it engages. Note: Do not hold your hand near the handwheel. Note: The green mark on the handwheel must align with the green mark on the tow ball. 2. Turn the key counterclockwise and remove the key to lock the tow ball. 3. Pull the protecting cap from the key bow and press it onto the lock. Driving With a Trailer WARNING If any of the below conditions cannot be met, do not use the tow bar and have it checked by an authorized dealer. 126 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 the green marks are aligned the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted to the tow ball arm you have removed the key (B) the tow ball arm is securely positioned. Towing Maintenance Note: Unhitch the trailer. 1. Remove the protecting cap. Press the cap into the key bow. Insert the key and unlock. 2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the handwheel out, turn it clockwise against the stop. 3. Remove the tow ball arm. 4. Release the handwheel. WARNING Remove the tow ball arm and protect the seat with the plug before steam cleaning your vehicle. Keep the system clean. Periodically lubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, and locking balls with resin-free grease or oil and the lock with graphite. When unlocked in this way, the tow ball arm can be reinserted at any time. In case of loss, replacement keys are available from the manufacturer by stating the number on the lock cylinder. Driving Without a Trailer WARNING TOWING POINTS Never unlock the tow ball arm with the trailer attached. WARNING The towing eye has a left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install it. Make sure that the towing eye is fully tightened. Front Towing Eye Space is provided in the spare wheel well. Remove the tow ball arm. Insert the plug into its seat (1). You must carry the towing eye in your vehicle at all times. Remove the cover and install the towing eye. 127 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Towing Rear Towing Hook Drive off slowly and smoothly without jerking the vehicle that is being towed. You must only use the towing eye that was delivered with your vehicle. See Towing Points (page 127). Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be placed on the same side. For example; right hand rear towing point to right hand front towing point. You must use a tow rope or rigid towing bar that is of the correct strength for the weight of the towing vehicle and the vehicle that is being towed. Note: Using a rigid towing bar is the safest way to tow a vehicle. Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar, use this to tow other vehicles. The weight of the vehicle that is being towed must not exceed the weight of the towing vehicle. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS - VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL TRANSMISSION Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 128). TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS - VEHICLES WITH: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNINGS You must switch the ignition on when your vehicle is being towed. Failure to follow this warning could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNINGS You must switch the ignition on when your vehicle is being towed. Failure to follow this warning could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The brake and steering assistance will not operate unless the engine is running. Press the brake pedal harder and allow for increased stopping distances and heavier steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury. You must make sure the transmission selector lever is placed in position N. Failure to follow this warning could damage the transmission and may lead to a crash or injury. Too much tension on a tow rope could cause damage to your vehicle or the vehicle that is towing. When towing your vehicle you must select neutral. Failure to follow this warning could damage the transmission and may lead to a crash or injury. 128 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Towing Note: Using a rigid towing bar is the safest way to tow a vehicle. WARNINGS The brake and steering assistance will not operate unless the engine is running. Press the brake pedal harder and allow for increased stopping distances and heavier steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury. The weight of the vehicle that is being towed must not exceed the weight of the towing vehicle. Too much tension on a tow rope could cause damage to your vehicle or the vehicle that is towing. Emergency Towing If your vehicle is disabled without access to wheel dollies, a car-hauling trailer, or a flatbed transport vehicle it can be flat-towed with all wheels on the ground. You may do this under the following conditions: • Your vehicle is facing forward so that it is towed in a forward direction. • The transmission selector lever is placed in position N. If the transmission gear shift lever cannot be moved to position N, it may need to be overridden. See Automatic Transmission (page 104). • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). • Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers). Drive off slowly and smoothly without jerking the vehicle that is being towed. You must only use the towing eye that was delivered with your vehicle. See Towing Points (page 127). Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be placed on the same side. For example; right hand rear towing point to right hand front towing point. You must use a tow rope or rigid towing bar that is of the correct strength for the weight of the towing vehicle and the vehicle that is being towed. 129 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Driving Hints BREAKING-IN WARNINGS Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. Tires WARNING In an emergency, you can drive your vehicle through water to a maximum depth of 8 inches (200 millimeters) and at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). You must take extra care when driving through flowing water. New tires need to be run-in for approximately 300 miles (500 kilometers). During this time, you may experience different driving characteristics. When driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop your vehicle. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so: • Depress the brake pedal lightly to check that the brakes are functioning correctly. • Check that the horn works. • Check that your vehicle's lamps are fully operational. • Check the power assistance of the steering system. Brakes and Clutch WARNING Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch if possible for the first 100 miles (150 kilometers) in town and for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers) on freeways. Engine WARNING Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. FLOOR MATS COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS The functional operation of some components and systems can be affected at temperatures below -13°F (-25°C). DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNINGS Drive through water in an emergency only and not as part of normal driving. 130 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Driving Hints WARNINGS Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle, leaving the pedal area unobstructed, and which can be firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Incorrectly fitted floor mats can cause the accelerator pedal to become stuck in the open position. This can cause loss of vehicle control. Always correctly install the floor mats to the retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position or obstruct pedal operation. Do not place unsecured floor mats or any other covering in the foot well. Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This will reduce the pedal clearance and interfere with the pedal operation. Do not allow objects to fall or become trapped under the pedals of your vehicle. This can cause loss of vehicle control. Carry out regular inspections to make sure the floor mats are secure. To install the floor mats, position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position. Remove in reverse order. 131 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Roadside Emergencies HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS WARNINGS Always use booster cables with insulated clamps and adequate size cable. The hazard warning button is located on the instrument panel. Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. Note: Do not disconnect the battery from your vehicle’s electrical system. To Connect the Booster Cables Press the button to turn on the hazard warning function, and the front and rear direction indicators will flash. Press the button again to turn them off. Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will lose charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your engine. Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, the hazard warning flashers may flash if you brake heavily. FIRST AID KIT Space is provided in the luggage compartment. WARNING TRIANGLE Space is provided in the luggage compartment. JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNINGS Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. 1. Vehicle with low charge battery B Booster battery vehicle C Positive connection cable D Negative connection cable Position the vehicles so that they do not touch one another. 2. Switch off the engine and any electrical equipment. Connect batteries with only the same nominal voltage. 132 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A Roadside Emergencies 3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of vehicle B with the positive (+) terminal of vehicle A (cable C). Disconnect the cables in the reverse order. 4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of vehicle B to the ground connection of vehicle A (cable D). WARNINGS Do not connect directly to the negative (–) terminal of the battery with low charge. Make sure that the cables are clear of any moving parts and fuel delivery system parts. To Start the Engine 1. Run the engine of vehicle B at a moderately high speed. 2. Start the engine of vehicle A. 3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of three minutes before disconnecting the cables. WARNING Do not switch on the headlamps when disconnecting the cables. The peak voltage could blow the bulbs. 133 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Box FUSE BOX LOCATIONS This fuse box is located behind the glove box. Open the glove box and empty the contents. Press the sides inwards and swivel the glove box downward. Engine Compartment Fuse Box 134 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART - VEHICLES BUILT UP TO: 04-012013 Engine Compartment Fuse Box Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 1 40 A Anti-lock braking system module 1 30 A Anti-lock braking system, electronic stability program module 2 60 A Cooling system fan high speed 3 40 A Cooling system fan 3 30 A Cooling system fan low speed 4 30 A Heater blower 135 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 5 60 A Passenger's compartment fuse box supply (battery) 6 30 A Body control module 7 60 A Passenger's compartment fuse box supply (ignition) 8 60 A Glow plugs 8 50 A DPS6 module 9 40 A Heated windshield 10 40 A Heated windshield 11 30 A Starter relay 12 10 A High beam left-hand relay 13 10 A High beam right-hand relay 14 15 A Run on pump 15 20 A Ignition coil 16 15 A Powertrain control module, high and low cooling fan 17 15 A Heated oxygen sensors (gasoline engines) 17 20 A Power supply module (diesel engines) 18 - 19 7.5A Not used 20 - Not used 21 - Not used Air condition controller 22 15 A Lighting control battery supply 23 15 A Front fog lamps 24 15 A Direction indicators 25 15 A Exterior lighting left-hand side 26 15 A Exterior lighting right-hand side 27 7.5 A Powertrain control module 28 20 A Anti-lock braking system, electronic stability program 29 10 A Air conditioning clutch 136 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 30 - Not used 31 - Not used 32 20 A Horn, battery saver, keyless vehicle module 33 20 A Heated rear window 34 20 A Fuel pump relay, diesel fuel heater 35 15 A Cat1 alarm system 36 7.5A Automatic transmission controller 37 25 A Front door module left-hand side 38 25 A Front door module right-hand side 39 25 A Rear door module left-hand side 40 25 A Rear door module right-hand side Relay Circuits switched R1 Cooling system fan R2 Not used R3 Powertrain control module R4 High beam R5 Not used R6 Not used R7 Engine cooling fan R8 Starter R9 Air conditioning clutch R10 Front fog lamps R11 Fuel pump, diesel fuel heater R12 Reversing lamp R13 Heater blower 137 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Passenger's Compartment Fuse Box - Type 1 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 1 7.5 A Ignition, rain sensor, heated windshield 2 10 A Stop lamps 3 7.5 A Reversing lamp, rear view camera 4 7.5 A Headlamp leveling 5 - 6 15 A Rear window wiper 7 15 A Washer pump Not used 8 - 9 15 A Passenger's heated seat 10 15 A Driver's heated seat 11 - 12 10 A 138 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Not used Not used Airbag module Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 13 10 A Ignition, electric power assisted steering, instrument cluster, passive anti-theft system, anti-lock braking system 14 7.5 A Powertrain control module, transmission selector lever, fuel pump 15 7.5 A Audio system, instrument cluster 16 7.5 A Heated windshield 17 - Not used 18 - Not used 19 15 A Data link connector 20 20 A Multi function display, clock, internal scanner, heating vents, air conditioning panel 21 15 A Audio system, navigation, bluetooth 22 7.5 A Instrument cluster 23 7.5 A Trailer module 24 7.5 A Sync module antenna 25 - 26 30 A Front wiper, left-hand side 27 30 A Front wiper, right-hand side Relay R1 Not used Circuits switched Ignition 139 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Passenger's Compartment Fuse Box - Type 2 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 1 7.5 A Ignition, rain sensor, heated windshield, dome lamp, interior mirror 2 10 A Stop lamps 3 7.5 A Reversing lamp 4 7.5 A Headlamp leveling 5 - 140 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Not used Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 6 15 A Rear window wiper 7 15 A Washer pump 8 - Not used 9 15 A Passenger's heated seat 10 15 A Driver's heated seat 11 - 12 10 A Airbag module 13 10 A Ignition, electric power assisted steering, instrument cluster, passive anti-theft system, anti-lock braking system 14 7.5 A Powertrain control module, gear selector lever, fuel pump 15 7.5 A Audio system, instrument cluster 16 7.5 A Heated windshield righthand side 17 - Not used 18 - Not used 19 10 A Data link connector 20 20 A Trailer module 21 15 A Audio system, navigation 22 7.5 A Instrument cluster 23 7.5 A Multi functional display, clock, internal scanner, heating vents, air conditioning panel 24 10 A Sync module 25 - 141 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Not used Not used Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 26 30 A Front wiper, left-hand side 27 30 A Front wiper, right-hand side 28 30 A Voltage quality module 29 20 A Rear power point 30 20 A Cigar lighter, front power point 31 - Not used 32 - Not used 33 - Not used 34 20 A Keyless entry 35 20 A Keyless entry 36 10 A Data link connector 37 15 A Ignition switch 38 - Not used 39 - Not used 40 - Not used 41 - Not used 42 7.5 A Rear view camera 43 10 A Active city stop module 44 - Not used 45 - Not used 46 - Not used 47 - Not used 48 - Not used 49 - Not used 142 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Relay Circuits switched R1 Ignition R2 Cigar lighter R3 Not used R4 Active city stop relay R5 Not used R6 Keyless entry (accessory) R7 Keyless entry (ignition) R8 Battery saver relay R9 Heated front screen left-hand side R10 Heated front screen right-hand side R11 Not used R12 Not used 143 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART - VEHICLES BUILT FROM: 05-012013 Engine Compartment Fuse Box Fuse Fuse rating 1 30 A Anti-lock brake system module Stability assist module 2 60 A Cooling system fan high speed 40 A Cooling system fan 30 A Cooling system fan low speed 4 30 A Heater blower 5 60 A Passenger compartment fuse box supply (battery) 3 Circuits protected 144 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Fuse Fuse rating 6 30 A Body control module 7 60 A Passenger compartment fuse box supply (ignition) 60 A Glow plugs (Diesel engines) 8 Circuits protected 50 A DPS6 module 9 40 A Heated windshield left-hand side 10 40 A Heated windshield right-hand side 11 30 A Starter relay 12 10 A High beam left-hand relay 13 10 A High beam right-hand relay 14 15 A Run on pump 15 20 A Ignition coil 16 15 A Powertrain control module High and low cooling fan 17 15 A Heated oxygen sensors (gasoline engines) 17 20 A Power supply module (diesel engines) 18 - 19 7.5A 20 - Not used 21 - Not used 22 20 A Lighting control battery supply 23 15 A Front fog lamps 24 15 A Direction indicators 25 15 A Exterior lighting left-hand side 26 15 A Exterior lighting right-hand side 27 7.5 A Powertrain control module 28 20 A Anti-lock brake system Stability assist 29 10 A Air conditioning clutch Not used Air conditioning controller 145 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 30 - Not used 31 - Not used 32 20 A Horn Battery saver Keyless vehicle module 33 20 A Heated rear window 34 20 A Fuel pump relay Diesel fuel heater 35 15 A Category 1 alarm system 36 7.5A Automatic transmission controller 37 25 A Front door module left-hand side 38 25 A Front door module right-hand side 39 25 A Rear door module left-hand side 40 25 A Rear door module right-hand side Relay Circuits switched R1 Cooling system fan R2 Not used R3 Powertrain control module R4 High beam R5 Not used R6 Not used R7 Engine cooling fan R8 Starter R9 Air conditioning clutch R10 Front fog lamps R11 Fuel pump 146 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses Relay Circuits switched Diesel fuel heater R12 Reversing lamp R13 Heater blower Passenger Compartment Fuse Box Fuse Fuse rating 1 7.5 A 147 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Circuits protected Ignition Rain sensor Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Heated windshield Dome lamp Interior mirror 2 10 A Stop lamps 3 3A Reversing lamp 4 7.5 A Headlamp leveling 5 - 6 15 A Rear window wiper 7 15 A Washer pump 8 - 9 15 A Passenger heated seat 10 15 A Driver heated seat 11 - 12 10 A Airbag module 13 10 A Ignition Electric power assisted steering Instrument cluster Passive anti-theft system Anti-lock brake system 14 7.5 A Powertrain control module Fuel pump Transmission selector lever 15 7.5 A Audio system Instrument cluster 16 7.5 A Heated windshield 17 - Not used 18 - Not used 19 10 A Data link connector 20 20 A Trailer module 21 15 A Audio system 148 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Not used Not used Not used Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Navigation 22 7.5 A Instrument cluster 23 7.5 A Multi functional display Clock Internal scanner Heating vents Air conditioning panel 24 10 A SYNC module 25 - 26 30 A Front wiper left-hand side Not used 27 30 A Front wiper right-hand side 28 30 A Voltage quality module 29 20 A Rear power point 30 20 A Cigar lighter Auxiliary power point 31 - Not used 32 - Not used 33 - Not used 34 20 A Keyless entry 35 20 A Keyless entry 36 - 37 15 A 38 - Not used 39 - Not used 40 - Not used 41 - Not used 42 7.5 A Rear view camera 43 10 A Active city stop module 149 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Not used Ignition switch Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 44 7.5 A Passenger airbag deactivation indicator 45 - Not used 46 - Not used 47 - Not used 48 - Not used 49 - Not used Relay Circuits switched R1 Ignition R2 Cigar lighter R3 Not used R4 Active city stop relay R5 Not used R6 Keyless entry (accessory) R7 Keyless entry (ignition) R8 Battery saver relay R9 Heated windshield left-hand side R10 Heated windshield right-hand side R11 Not used R12 Not used WARNINGS CHANGING A FUSE Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment off before attempting to change a fuse. WARNINGS Do not modify the electrical system of your vehicle in any way. Have repairs to the electrical system and the replacement of relays and high current fuses carried out by an authorized dealer. Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. 150 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Fuses If electrical components in your vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. A break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 151 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance GENERAL INFORMATION • Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized repairers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. Authorized repairers are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly, with a wide range of highly specialized tools. • In addition to regular servicing, we recommend that you carry out the following checks. • • • • • • Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid Check (page 159). Tire pressures (when cold). See Technical Specifications (page 183). Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires (page 174). Monthly Checks • WARNINGS Switch the ignition off before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. Do not touch the electronic ignition system parts after you have switched the ignition on or when the engine is running. The system operates at high voltage. Engine coolant level (engine cold). See Engine Coolant Check (page 158). Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks. Air conditioning operation. Parking brake operation. Horn operation. Tightness of lug nuts. See Technical Specifications (page 183). OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD Opening the Hood Keep your hands and clothing clear of the engine cooling fan. Under certain conditions, the fan may continue to run for several minutes after you have switched the engine off. Make sure that you fit filler caps securely after carrying out maintenance checks. Daily Checks • • • Exterior lamps. Interior lamps. Warning lamps and indicators. Check When Refueling • • Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 157). Brake fluid level. See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). 1. 152 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Pull the hood release handle. Maintenance 2. Move the catch to the left. 3. Open the hood and support it with the hood strut. Closing the Hood 1. Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure correctly after use. 2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop from under its own weight for the last 8 - 11 inches (20 – 30 centimeters). Note: Make sure that you have closed the hood correctly. 153 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.0L ECOBOOST™ * * A Engine coolant reservoir : See Engine Coolant Check (page 158). B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive) : See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). C Engine oil filler cap : See Engine Oil Check (page 157). D Battery: See Changing the 12V Battery (page 159). E Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive) : See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). * * * F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 134). G Windshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 159). H Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary. I Engine oil dipstick : See Engine Oil Check (page 157). * The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification. 154 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.4L DURATEC-16V (SIGMA)/1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA) * * A Engine coolant reservoir : See Engine Coolant Check (page 158). B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive) : See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). C Engine oil filler cap : See Engine Oil Check (page 157). D Battery: See Changing the 12V Battery (page 159). E Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive) : See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 134). G Windshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 159). H Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary. I Engine oil dipstick : See Engine Oil Check (page 157). * * * * The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification. 155 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L DURATORQ-TDCI/1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL * * A Engine coolant reservoir : See Engine Coolant Check (page 158). B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive) : See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). C Engine oil filler cap : See Engine Oil Check (page 157). D Battery: See Changing the 12V Battery (page 159). E Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive) : See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 159). * * * F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 134). G Windshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 159). H Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary. I Engine oil dipstick : See Engine Oil Check (page 157). * The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification. 156 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.0L ECOBOOST™ A Minimum B Maximum ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L DURATORQ-TDCI/1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.4L DURATEC-16V (SIGMA)/1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA) A Minimum B Maximum ENGINE OIL CHECK 1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 2. Switch off the engine and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. A Minimum B Maximum If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Technical Specifications (page 169). Note: Check the oil level before starting the engine. Note: Make sure that the oil level is between the minimum and the maximum marks. Note: Do not use oil additives or other engine treatments. Under certain conditions, they may damage the engine. Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3000 miles (5000 kilometers). 157 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Adding Oil Adding Engine Coolant WARNINGS Only add oil when the engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down. Failure to take care may result in personal injury. WARNINGS Only add coolant when the engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down. Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Failure to take care may result in personal injury. Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is hot. Wait for the engine to cool down. 1. Remove the filler cap. 2. Add oil that meets Ford specifications. See Technical Specifications (page 169). 3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. Undiluted coolant is flammable and may ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust. Note: In an emergency, you can add just water to the cooling system to reach a vehicle service station. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. Note: Prolonged use of incorrect dilution of the coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Note: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. 1. Remove the filler cap. Any pressure will escape slowly as you unscrew the cap. 2. Add a 50/50 mixture of coolant and water using fluid that meets the Ford specifications. See Technical Specifications (page 169). 3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance. WARNING Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician. Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may therefore extend beyond the MAX mark. If the level is at the MIN mark, add coolant immediately. 158 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID CHECK WARNINGS Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. See (page 169). Note: The brake and the clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir. Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. This could cause serious personal injury. Rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and consult a physician. WASHER FLUID CHECK Note: The reservoir supplies the front and rear washer systems. A fluid level between the MAX and MIN lines is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level outside of the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the brake or clutch systems. Have your vehicle checked immediately. When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer fluid and water to help prevent freezing in cold weather and improve the cleaning capability. We recommend that you use only high quality washer fluid. For information on fluid dilution, refer to the product instructions. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNING For vehicles with Start-Stop the battery requirement is different. You must replace the battery with one of exactly the same specification. The battery is located in the engine compartment. See Maintenance (page 152). 159 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Note: You must reset the bounce-back feature for the power windows. See Power Windows (page 53). Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES 1. Press the locking buttons together. 2. Rotate and remove the wiper blade. 3. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. Rear Window Wiper Blade 1. Lift the wiper arm. Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Windshield Wiper Blades Note: The windshield wiper blades are different in length. See Technical Specifications (page 169). If you install wiper blades of the wrong length, the rain sensor may not work correctly. 2. Position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. 3. Disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm. 4. Remove the wiper blade. 5. Install in the reverse order. 160 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS You can adjust the headlamp beams for when you drive on the right-hand side or left-hand side of the road. 2. Remove the screws and push pins. 3. Lift the outer side of the headlamp to disengage it from the lower fixing point. 4. Pull the headlamp as far as possible toward the center of your vehicle and remove. 1. Remove the headlamps. See Removing a Headlamp (page 161). 2. Remove the covers. See Changing a Bulb (page 162). 3. Slide the control on each headlamp to adjust the headlamp beam. Note: When you return to driving on the other side of the road, remember to change the headlamp beams to the original setting. REMOVING A HEADLAMP 1. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 152). 5. Disconnect the two electrical connectors. Note: When fitting the headlamp, make sure that you reconnect the electrical connector correctly. 161 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Note: When fitting the headlamp, make sure that you fully engage the headlamp in the lower fixing point. Direction Indicator 1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 161). CHANGING A BULB WARNINGS Switch the lamps and the ignition off. Let the bulb cool down before removing it. Do not touch the glass of the bulb. Note: Only fit bulbs of the correct specification. Note: The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Fit replacements in the reverse order unless otherwise stated. Headlamp Note: Remove the covers to gain access to the bulbs. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it counterclockwise and remove it. Headlamp High Beam 1. A Headlamp high beam B Headlamp low beam C Direction indicator 162 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 161). Maintenance Side Lamp 1. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Release the clip and remove the bulb. Note: Do not touch the glass of the bulb. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Remove the bulb holder. 4. Remove the bulb. Headlamp Low Beam 1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 161). Side Repeater 2. Remove the cover. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 4. Remove the bulb. Note: Do not touch the glass of the bulb. 1. 163 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 161). Carefully remove the side repeater. Maintenance 2. Remove the bulb holder. 3. Remove the bulb. Approach Lamp 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Remove the bulb. Note: Position the mirror glass as far inward as possible. Front Fog Lamps 1. Insert a screwdriver into the gap between the mirror housing and the mirror glass and release the metal retaining clip. Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp bulb from the bulb holder. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 164 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Rear Lamps Direction Indicator, Tail and Brake Lamp 1. 5. Remove the bulb holder. 6. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it counterclockwise and remove it. A. Tail and brake lamp B. Direction indicator Remove the trim panel. Reversing Lamp and Fog Lamp 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the wing nut. 4. Remove the lamp. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the trim panel. 165 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 5. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Insert a suitable object into the holes. 4. Carefully pull the lamp toward the front of the vehicle to release the spring clips. Central High Mounted Brake Lamp 5. Remove the lamp. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Detach the clips. 166 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Interior Lamp 1. Carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the bulb. 6. Remove the bulb holder. 7. Remove the bulb. Licence Plate Lamp Reading Lamps 1. Carefully release the spring clip. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Remove the bulb. 1. Carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the bulb. 167 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Luggage Compartment Lamp, Footwell Lamp and Liftgate Lamp 1. Carefully prize out the lamp. 2. Remove the bulb. BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Lamp Specification Power (watt) PY21W 21 Headlamp high beam - high series H1 55 Headlamp high beam - low series H15 55 Headlamp low beam H7 55 Front fog lamp H8 55 W5W 5 WY5W 5 W5W 5 Front direction indicator Side lamp - low series Side repeater Approach lamp Rear direction indicator PY21W 21 Brake and tail lamp P21/5W 21/5 Rear fog lamp H21W 21 Reversing lamp P21W 21 Licence plate lamp W5W 5 Luggage compartment lamp W5W 5 168 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Vehicle Fluids Note: Use fluids which meet the specifications or requirements defined. Use of other fluids may lead to damage which is not covered by your warranty. Specification Viscosity Grade Engine oil - gasoline engines only WSS-M2C948-B 5W-20 Castrol or Ford Engine Oil Alternative engine oil - all gasoline engines except 1.0L EcoBoost WSS-M2C913-C 5W-30 Castrol or Ford Engine Oil Engine oil - diesel engines WSS-M2C913-C 5W-30 Castrol or Ford Engine Oil Antifreeze WSS-M97B44-D - Motorcraft SuperPlus Antifreeze Brake fluid WSS-M6C65-A2 - Motorcraft or Ford DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid Item Recommended fluid Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel economy benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine. Adding oil: If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined by WSS-M2C913-C or WSS-M2C948-B (gasoline engines only), you must use SAE 5W-30 that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5. Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels. Castrol engine oil recommended. 169 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Variant Item Capacity in gallons (liters) All Windshield and rear window washer system 0.6 (2.5) 1.0L EcoBoost Engine cooling system approximately 1.4 (6.3) Vehicles with a gasoline engine except 1.0L EcoBoost Engine cooling system approximately 1.2 (5.5) Vehicles with a diesel engine Engine cooling system approximately 1.3 (6) Vehicles with a gasoline engine Fuel tank 10.6 (48) Vehicles with a diesel engine Fuel tank 10.3 (47) 1.0L EcoBoost Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter 0.9 (4.1) 1.0L EcoBoost Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter 0.9 (4.0) 1.4L Duratec-16V Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter 0.9 (4.1) 1.4L Duratec-16V Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter 0.8 (3.8) 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter 0.9 (4.1) 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter 0.8 (3.8) 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter 0.8 (3.8) 170 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Maintenance Variant Item Capacity in gallons (liters) 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter 0.8 (3.4) 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter 0.8 (3.8) 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter 0.8 (3.5) Engine Oil Adding Capacities Engine Capacity in gallons (liters) 1.0L EcoBoost 0.2 (0.8) 1.4L Duratec-16V and 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT 0.2 (0.8) 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi 0.4 (1.6) 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi 0.4 (1.6) 171 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Vehicle Care Cleaning the Chrome Trim CLEANING THE EXTERIOR WARNINGS Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents. Use soapy water. WARNINGS If you use a car wash with a waxing cycle, make sure that you remove the wax from the windshield. Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended. Prior to using a car wash facility check the suitability of it for your vehicle. Some car wash installations use water at high pressure. This could damage certain parts of your vehicle. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, may cause damage over a period of time. Remove the aerial before using an automatic car wash. Body Paintwork Preservation Switch the heater blower off to prevent contamination of the fresh air filter. WARNINGS Do not polish your vehicle in strong sunshine. We recommend that you wash your vehicle with a sponge and lukewarm water containing a car shampoo. Do not allow polish to touch plastic surfaces. It could be difficult to remove. Cleaning the Headlamps Do not apply polish to the windshield or rear window. This could cause the wipers to become noisy and they may not clear the window properly. WARNINGS Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them. We recommend that you wax the paintwork once or twice a year. Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry. CLEANING THE INTERIOR Cleaning the Rear Window Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be covered by your warranty. WARNING Do not scrape the inside of the rear window or use abrasives or chemical solvents to clean it. Safety Belts WARNINGS Do not use abrasives, or chemical solvents to clean them. Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp chamois leather to clean the inside of the rear window. 172 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Vehicle Care CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS WARNINGS Do not allow moisture to penetrate the safety belt retractor mechanism. Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers. Clean them with interior cleaner or water applied with a soft sponge. Let them dry naturally, away from artificial heat. Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over a period of time. Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens and Radio Screens Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent. WARNING Do not use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them. Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. Rear Windows WARNING Do not use any abrasive materials to clean the interior of the rear windows. Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers. Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the interior of the rear windows. Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain their condition we recommend that you: • Clean them weekly with the recommended wheel and tire cleaner. • Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. • Rinse them thoroughly with a pressurized stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE You should repair paintwork damage caused by stones from the road or minor scratches as soon as possible. A choice of products are available from an authorized dealer. Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. We recommend that you use Ford service wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Using other non-recommended cleaning products can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. Always read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the products. 173 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS Do not use the kit on run flat tires. A decal with tire pressure data is located in the driver’s door opening. Do not try to seal damage to the tire’s sidewall. Check and set the tire pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive your vehicle and when the tires are cold. The kit seals most tire punctures [with a diameter of up to ¼ inch (six millimeters)] to temporarily restore mobility. Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to optimize fuel economy. You must observe the following rules when using the kit: Note: Use only approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage your vehicle and will make the National Type Approval invalid. • Note: If you change the diameter of the tires from that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the engine management system reprogrammed. • Note: If you intend to change the size of the wheels from that fitted at the factory, check the suitability with an authorized dealer. • • TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT • Your vehicle may not have a spare tire. Therefore you will have a temporary mobility kit which will only repair one damaged tire. Using the Kit The kit is located in the spare wheel well. WARNINGS Compressed air can act as an explosive or propellant. General Information WARNINGS Depending on the type and extent of tire damage, some tires can only be partially sealed or not sealed at all. Loss of tire pressure can affect vehicle handling, leading to loss of vehicle control. Never leave the kit unattended while in use. Do not keep the compressor operating for more than 10 minutes. You must only use the kit for the vehicle with which it was supplied. Do not use the kit on a previously damaged tire, for example when it has been driven under inflated. 174 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Drive with caution and avoid making sudden steering or driving manoeuvres, especially if your vehicle is heavily laden or you are towing a trailer. The kit will provide you with an emergency temporary repair, enabling you to continue your journey to the next vehicle or tire dealer, or to drive a maximum distance of 125 miles (200 kilometers). Do not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep the kit out of the reach of children. Only use the kit when the ambient temperature is between -40°F (–40°C) and +158°F (+70°C). Wheels and Tires • • • • • • Park your vehicle at the roadside so that you do not obstruct the flow of traffic and so that you are able to use the kit without being in danger. Apply the parking brake, even if you have parked on a level road, to make sure that your vehicle will not move. Do not attempt to remove foreign objects like nails or screws penetrating the tire. Leave the engine running while the kit is in use, but not if your vehicle is in an enclosed or poorly ventilated area (e.g, inside a building). In these circumstances, switch the compressor on with the engine switched off. You must replace the sealant bottle with a new one before the expiry date (see top of bottle). Inform all other users of your vehicle that the tire has been temporarily sealed with the kit. Make them aware of the special driving conditions that must be observed. WARNINGS If the tire inflation pressure does not reach 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 10 minutes, the tire may have suffered excessive damage, making a temporary repair impossible. Do not continue driving with this tire. Inflating the Tire WARNINGS Check the sidewall of the tire prior to inflation. If there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage, do not attempt to inflate the tire. Do not stand directly beside the tire while the compressor is operating. Watch the sidewall of the tire. If any cracks, bumps or similar damage appears, switch off the compressor and let the air out by means of the pressure relief valve I. Do not continue driving with this tire. The sealant contains natural rubber latex. Avoid contact with skin and clothing. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact a Physician. 175 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A Label B Sealant bottle C Sealant bottle hose D Bottle holder E Pressure gauge F Power plug with cable G Compressor switch Wheels and Tires H Repair kit hose I Pressure relief valve Note: When pumping in the sealant through the tire valve, the pressure may rise up to 87 psi (6 bar) but will drop again after about 30 seconds. 1. Remove the kit from the wrapping. 2. Peel off the label A showing the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) from the sealant bottle and attach it to the instrument panel in the driver’s field of view. Make sure the label does not obscure anything important. 3. Take the hose H with the pressure relief valve I and the power plug with cable F out of the kit. 4. Connect the hose H with the pressure relief valve I to the sealant bottle B. 5. Engage the sealant bottle B into the bottle holder D. 6. Remove the valve cap from the damaged tire. 7. Screw the sealant bottle hose C firmly onto the valve of the damaged tire. 8. Make sure that the compressor switch G is in position 0. 9. Insert the power plug F into the cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power socket. See Auxiliary Power Points (page 88). See Cigar Lighter (page 88). 10. Start the engine. 11. Move the compressor switch G to position 1. 12. Inflate the tire for no longer than 10 minutes to an inflation pressure of minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) and a maximum of 51 psi (3.5 bar). Move the compressor switch G to position 0 and check the current tire pressure with pressure gauge E. Note: If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not reached do not continue. Note: After you have switched the compressor off, you may hear air escaping from the damaged tire. This is normal and can be ignored provided that the specified minimum tire pressure has been reached. 13. Remove the power plug F from the cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power socket. 14. Quickly unscrew the hose C from the tire valve. Fasten the valve cap again. Note: Some residual sealant fluid may drip or spray out of hose C while you are disconnecting it. This is normal. 15. 16. 17. WARNING If you experience heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behaviour or noises while driving, reduce your speed and drive with caution to a place where it is safe for you to stop your vehicle. Recheck the tire and its pressure. If the tire pressure is less than 14.7 psi (1 bar) or if there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage visible, do not continue driving with this tire. 18. 176 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Leave the sealant bottle B in the bottle holder D. Make sure the kit is stored safely, but still easily accessible in your vehicle. The kit will be required again when you check the tire pressure. Immediately drive approximately two miles (three kilometers) so that the sealant can seal the damaged area. Stop your vehicle after driving approximately two miles (three kilometers). Check, and where necessary, adjust the pressure of the damaged tire. Wheels and Tires 19. Attach the kit and read the tire pressure from the pressure gauge E. 20. Adjust it to the specified pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 183). 21. Once you have inflated the tire to its correct tire pressure, move the compressor switch G to position 0, remove the power plug F from the socket, unscrew the hose C and fasten the valve cap. 22. Leave hose C and H connected to the sealant bottle B and store the kit away safely. 23. Go to the nearest tire specialist to get the damaged tire replaced. Before the tire is removed from the rim, inform your tire dealer that the tire contains sealant. You must renew the sealant bottle B and hose C as soon as possible once used. Note: Remember that the kit only provides temporary mobility. Regulations concerning tire repair after using the kit may differ from country to country. You should consult a tire specialist for advice. TIRE CARE To make sure the front and rear tires of your vehicle wear evenly and last longer, we recommend that you swap the tires from front to rear and vice versa at regular intervals of between 3000 and 6000 miles (5000 and 10000 kilometers). WARNING Do not scrub the sidewalls of the tires when you are parking. If you have to mount a curb, do so slowly and approach it with the wheels at right-angles to the curb. WARNING Examine the tires regularly for cuts, foreign objects and uneven wear of the tread. Uneven wear could mean that the wheel alignment is outside specification. Before driving, make sure the tire is adjusted to the recommended inflation pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 183). You must, monitor the tire pressure until the sealed tire is replaced. Check the tire pressures (including the spare) when cold, every two weeks. USING WINTER TIRES Empty sealant bottles can be disposed of together with normal household waste. Return remains of sealant to an authorized dealer or dispose of it in compliance with local waste disposal regulations. WARNING When you use winter tires on your vehicle, you must make sure that you use the correct lug nuts. If winter tires are used, you must make sure that you use the correct tire pressures. See Technical Specifications (page 183). 177 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires USING SNOW CHAINS WARNINGS Do not drive on significantly under-inflated tires. This may cause the tires to overheat and fail. Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency, tire tread life and may also affect your ability to drive your vehicle safely. WARNINGS Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Do not use snow chains on snow-free roads. Do not bend or damage the valves when you are inflating the tires. Only fit snow chains to specified tires. See Technical Specifications (page 183). Have tires installed by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle has wheel trims, remove them before fitting snow chains. The deflation detection system will alert you if there is a change of air pressure in any tire. It does this by using the anti-lock braking sensors to detect the rolling circumference of the wheels. When the circumference changes, this indicates low tire pressure. A warning message is displayed in the information display and the message indicator will illuminate. See Information Messages (page 67). Note: The anti-lock braking system will continue to operate normally. Only use small link snow chains. Only use snow chains on the front wheels. Vehicles with Stability Control When stability control is on, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. To reduce this, switch traction control off. See Using Stability Control (page 111). If a low pressure warning message is displayed in the information display, check the tire pressures as soon as possible and inflate them to the recommended pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 183). TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM If this happens frequently, have the cause determined and rectified as soon as possible. WARNINGS The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to regularly check the tire pressures. Apart from a too low tire pressure or a damaged tire, the following situations can affect the rolling circumference: • Vehicle load is uneven. • When using a trailer or traveling up and down an incline. • Using snow chains. • Driving on soft surfaces such as snow or mud. The system will only provide a low tire pressure warning. It will not inflate the tires. Note: The system will still function correctly, but there may be an increased detection time. 178 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires System Reset Note: Do not reset the system when your vehicle is moving. WARNINGS Do not drive through an automatic car wash. Note: You should reset the system following any adjustment to the tire pressures or any changing of tires. If you are unsure what type of spare wheel you have do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Using the information display control, navigate to Menu > Vehicle settings > Deflation detection. 3. Press and hold the OK button until confirmation appears. Only fit snow chains to specified tires. See Technical Specifications (page 183). The ground clearance of your vehicle may be reduced. Take care when parking next to a curb. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL Note: Your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. Lug Nuts Vehicle Jack You can obtain a replacement locking lug nut key and replacement locking lug nuts from your dealer using the reference number certificate. WARNINGS The vehicle jack supplied with your vehicle should only be used when changing a wheel in emergency situations. Vehicles With a Spare Wheel Before using the vehicle jack, check that it is not damaged or deformed and that the thread is lubricated and free from foreign matter. If the spare wheel is exactly the same type and size as the other fitted road wheels, you can replace the existing road wheel with the spare wheel and continue to drive in the normal manner. Never place anything between the jack and the ground, or the jack and your vehicle. If the spare wheel is different to the other road wheels, it will carry a yellow label with the appropriate speed limit. Note: Vehicles with a temporary mobility kit do not have a vehicle jack or a wheel brace. Refer to the following information before changing the road wheel. WARNINGS Drive the shortest possible distances. It is recommended to use a workshop type hydraulic jack for changing between summer and winter tires. Do not fit more than one spare wheel on your vehicle at any one time. Note: Use a jack with a minimum lifting capacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting plate with a minimum diameter of 3.1 inches (80 millimeters). Do not carry out any tire repairs on a spare wheel. 179 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires Jacking and Lifting Points Vehicles With a Spare Wheel Your vehicle jack, wheel brace, screw-in towing eye and wheel trim remover are located in the spare wheel well. A Emergency use only B Maintenance WARNING Use only the specified jacking points. If you use other positions, you may damage the body, steering, suspension, engine, braking system or the fuel lines. 180 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires Assembling the Wheel Brace WARNING The screw-in towing eye has a left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install it. Make sure that the towing eye is fully tightened. A Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking points. Insert the screw-in towing eye into the wheel brace. Removing the Wheel Trim 1. Insert the wheel trim remover. 2. Remove the wheel trim. 181 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires Note: Make sure that you pull the wheel trim remover at right angles to the trim. Note: The spare wheel is located under the floor cover in the luggage compartment. Removing a Road Wheel 1. Install the locking lug nut key. WARNINGS Park your vehicle in such a position that neither the traffic nor you are hindered or endangered. Set up a warning triangle. Make sure that your vehicle is on firm, level ground with the wheels pointing straight ahead. Switch the ignition off and apply the parking brake. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, move the selector lever to first or reverse gear. If it has an automatic transmission, move the selector lever to position (P). Have the passengers leave your vehicle. 2. Slacken the lug nuts. 3. Jack up your vehicle until the tire is clear of the ground. 4. Remove the lug nuts and the wheel. Secure the diagonally opposite wheel with an appropriate block or wheel chock. Make sure that the arrows on directional tires point in the direction of rotation when your vehicle is moving forward. If you have to fit a spare wheel with the arrows pointing in the opposite direction, have the tire refitted in the correct direction by an authorized dealer. Installing a Road Wheel Do not work underneath your vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. WARNINGS Use only approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage your vehicle and will make the National Type Approval invalid. See Technical Specifications (page 183). Make sure that the jack is vertical to the jacking point and the base is flat on the ground. Do not fit run flat tires on vehicles that were not originally fitted with them. Contact an authorized dealer for more details about compatibility. Note: Do not lay alloy wheels face down on the ground, this will damage the paint. 182 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires WARNING Do not install alloy wheels using lug nuts designed for use with steel wheels. Note: The lug nuts of alloy wheels and spoked steel wheels can also be used for the steel spare wheel for a short time (maximum two weeks). Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact surfaces are free from foreign matter. Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug nuts are against the wheel. 1. Install the wheel. 2. Install the lug nuts finger tight. 3. Install the locking lug nut key. 4. Partially tighten the lug nuts in the sequence shown. 5. Lower your vehicle and remove the jack. 6. Fully tighten the lug nuts in the sequence shown. See Technical Specifications (page 183). 7. Install the wheel trim using the ball of your hand. WARNING Have the lug nuts checked for tightness and the tire pressure checked as soon as possible. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Lug Nut Torque Wheel type Ib-ft (Nm) All 100 (135) 183 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires Tire Pressures (Cold Tires) Up to 50 mph (80 km/h) Normal load Variant Temporary spare wheel when it differs from the other fitted wheels Tire size 125/80 R15 Full load Front Rear Front Rear lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) 61 (4.2) 61 (4.2) 61 (4.2) 61 (4.2) Up to 100mph (160 km/h) Normal load Variant * Tire size Full load Front Rear Front Rear lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) All engines 185/60 R15 * 33 (2.3) 29 (2) 36 (2.5) 41 (2.8) All engines 195/60 R15 32 (2.2) 29 (2) 36 (2.5) 46 (3.2) All engines 195/55 R16 32 (2.2) 29 (2) 36 (2.5) 41 (2.8) All engines 205/45 R17 33 (2.3) 29 (2) 36 (2.5) 41 (2.8) Only fit snow chains to specified tires. 184 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Wheels and Tires Continuous Speed in Excess of 100mph (160 km/h) Normal load Variant Tire size Full load Front Rear Front Rear lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) lbf/in² (bar) 31 (2.1) 38 (2.6) 46 (3.2) All engines 185/60 R15 * 35 (2.4) All engines 195/60 R15 32 (2.2) 31 (2.1) 36 (2.5) 46 (3.2) All engines 195/55 R16 32 (2.2) 32 (2.2) 36 (2.5) 41 (2.8) All engines 205/45 R17 35 (2.4) 31 (2.1) 38 (2.6) 41 (2.8) 185 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Capacities and Specifications Note: Your vehicle identification plate design may vary to that shown. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE A Model B Variant C Engine designation D Engine power and emission level E Vehicle identification number F Gross vehicle weight G Gross train weight H Maximum front axle weight I Maximum rear axle weight Note: The information shown on the vehicle identification plate is dependent upon market requirements. Your vehicle identification number and maximum weights are shown on a plate, located at the bottom of the lock side of the right-hand door aperture. 186 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Capacities and Specifications The vehicle identification number is stamped into the floor panel on the right-hand side, beside the front seat. It is also shown on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Vehicle dimensions Dimension description Dimension in inches (mm) Maximum length 160.5 (4077) Overall width including exterior mirrors 81.4 (2067) Overall height - EC curb weight 63.1 - 63.5 (1604 - 1613) Wheelbase 98.0 (2489) Front track 58.5 - 58.7 (1487 - 1492) Rear track 58.1 - 58.3 (1477 - 1482) 187 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Capacities and Specifications Towing equipment dimensions 188 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Capacities and Specifications Item Dimension description Dimension in inches (mm) A Bumper – end of tow ball 3.1 (78) B Attachment point – center of tow ball 0.7 (18) C Wheel center – center of tow ball D Center of tow ball – side member 20.3 (516) E Distance between side members 40.6 (1032) F Center of tow ball – center 1. attachment point 16.5 (419) G Center of tow ball – center 2. attachment point 26.3 (668) 189 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 33.3 (845) Audio System GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors Radio reception factors Distance and Strength The further you travel away from an FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. Station overload When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a stronger signal can override a weaker signal and can cause interference in the audio system. MP3 and WMA Track and Folder Structure CD and CD Player Information Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA track mode (system default) and MP3 and WMA folder mode. • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 or .WMA file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact an authorized dealer for further information. Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached. Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods. 190 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System • • MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 or .WMA file extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the current folder. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD WARNING If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present, (files with extensions other than mp3 and WMA), only files with the .mp3 and WMA extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 191 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System A Eject: Press the button to eject a CD. B Cursor arrows: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices. C CD slot: Where you insert a CD. D OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections. E INFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB and IPod information. F TA: Press the button to turn traffic announcements on or off and cancels announcements during an active announcement. G Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. H Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next track on a CD. I On, Off and Volume: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off. Turn the dial to adjust the volume. J Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the previous track on a CD. 192 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System K MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features. L SOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle, balance and fade. M AUX: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. N RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. O CD: Press the button to change source to CD, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. Manual Tuning Sound Button 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select RADIO mode and then MANUAL TUNE. 3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to tune down or up the waveband in small increments or press and hold to increment quickly, until you find a station you want to listen to. 4. Press OK to continue listening to a station. This will allow you to adjust the sound settings (for example bass, middle and treble). 1. Press the SOUND button. 2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the required setting. 3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to make the necessary adjustment. The display indicates the level selected. 4. Press the OK button to confirm the new settings. Scan Tuning Waveband Button Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds of each station detected. Press the RADIO button to select from the wavebands available. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select RADIO mode and then SCAN. 3. Use the seek buttons to scan up or down the selected waveband. 4. Press OK to continue listening to a station. You can use the selector to return to radio reception when you have been listening to another source. Alternatively, press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands. Scroll to the required waveband and press OK. Station Preset Buttons Station Tuning Control This feature allows you to store your favorite stations, they can be recalled by selecting the appropriate waveband and pressing one of the preset buttons. Seek Tuning Select a waveband and briefly press one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen. 1. Select a waveband. 2. Tune to the station required. 193 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System 3. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A progress bar and message will appear. When the progress bar completes the station has been stored. The audio unit will also mute momentarily as confirmation. When traffic information is broadcast, it will automatically interrupt normal radio or CD playback and Traffic announcement will appear in the display. If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled using a preset button, the audio unit will remain on that station unless TA or TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again. You can repeat this on each waveband and for each preset button. Note: When you drive to another part of the country, stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies and are stored on preset buttons, may be updated with the correct frequency and station name for that area. Note: If traffic announcement is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non traffic announcement station no traffic announcement will be heard. Note: When you are listening to a non traffic announcement station and turn traffic announcement off and on again a TP seek will occur. Autostore Control Note: This will store up to a maximum of the six strongest signals available, either from the AM or the FM waveband and overwrite the previously stored stations. You can also store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands. • • Traffic Announcement Volume Traffic announcements interrupt normal broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is usually louder than normal listening volumes. Press and hold the RADIO button. When the search is complete, sound is restored and the strongest signals are stored on the autostore presets. To adjust the preset volume: • Traffic Information Control Many stations that broadcast on the FM waveband have a TP code to signify that they carry traffic program information. Ending Traffic Announcements The audio unit will return to normal operation at the end of each traffic announcement. To end the announcement prematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC during the announcement. Turning Traffic Announcements On and Off Before you can receive traffic announcements, you must press either the TA or TRAFFIC button. A TA display will appear to show the feature is switched on. Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any other time it will switch all announcements off. If you are already tuned to a station that broadcasts traffic information, TP will also be displayed. Otherwise the unit will search for a traffic program. Automatic Volume Control When available, automatic volume control adjusts the volume level to compensate for engine noise and road speed noise. 194 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Use the volume control to make the necessary adjustment during an incoming traffic announcement broadcast. The display will show the level selected. Audio System 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the MENU button and select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL. Use the left or right arrow button to adjust the setting. Press the OK button to confirm your selection. Press the MENU button to return. When selected, the unit continually evaluates signal strength and if a better signal becomes available, the unit will switch to that alternative. It mutes while it checks a list of alternative frequencies and if necessary, it will search once across the selected waveband for a genuine alternative frequency. It will restore radio reception when it finds one or if one is not found, the unit will return to the original stored frequency. News Broadcasts When selected, AF will be shown in the display. Your audio unit may interrupt normal reception to broadcast news bulletins from stations on the FM waveband, radio data system or other enhanced network linked stations. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ or ALTERNATIVE FREQ and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. The display will indicate there is an incoming announcement, during news broadcasts. When the audio unit interrupts for a news broadcast the preset volume level will be the same as traffic announcements. Regional Mode Regional mode controls the behavior of alternative frequencies switching between regionally related networks of a parent broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly large network across a large part of the country. At various times of the day this large network may be broken down into a number of smaller regional networks, typically centered on major towns or cities. When the network is not split into regional variants, the whole network carries the same programming. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Alternative Frequencies The majority of programs that broadcast on the FM waveband have a program identification code, it can be recognized by audio units. Regional mode ON: This prevents random alternative frequency switches when neighboring regional networks are not carrying the same programming. When your vehicle moves from one transmission area to another with the alternative frequencies tuning switched on, this function will search for the strongest station signal. Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger coverage area if neighboring regional networks are carrying the same programming, but can cause random alternative frequency switches if they are not. Under certain conditions, alternative frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt normal reception. 1. 195 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Press the MENU button. Audio System 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Note: An integrated multi function display is situated above the unit. This shows important information regarding control of your system. Additionally, there are various icons placed around the display screen which light up when a function is active (for example CD, Radio or Aux.) AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/BLUETOOTH WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 196 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System A Eject: Press the button to eject a CD. B Cursor arrows: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices. C CD slot: Where you insert a CD. D OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections. E INFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB and IPod information. F TA: Press the button to turn traffic announcements on or off and cancels announcements during an active announcement. G Sound: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle, balance and fade. H Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. I Function button 4: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. 197 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System J Function button 3: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. K Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next track on a CD. L On, Off and Volume: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off. Turn the dial to adjust the volume. M Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the previous track on a CD. N Function button 2: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. O Function button 1: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. P MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features. Q PHONE: Press the button to access the phone feature of the SYNC system by pressing PHONE then MENU. See separate manual. R AUX: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. S RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. T CD: Press the button to change source to CD, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. 198 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System You can use the selector to return to radio reception when you have been listening to another source. Alternatively, press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands. Scroll to the required waveband and press OK. Station Tuning Control DAB Service Linking Note: The system does not automatically turn on every time you switch the ignition on. Note: Service linking allows cross-referencing to other corresponding frequencies of the same station, for example FM and other DAB ensembles. A Note: The system will automatically change to another corresponding station if the current one becomes unavailable, for example when leaving the coverage area. Descriptions for function buttons 1-4 Function buttons 1 to 4 are context dependent, and change according to the current unit mode. The description for the current function displays in the screen. Switching DAB service linking on and off. See General Information (page 63). Seek Tuning Sound Button Select a waveband and briefly press one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen. This will allow you to adjust the sound settings (for example bass, middle and treble). 1. Press the sound button. 2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the required setting. 3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to make the necessary adjustment. The display indicates the level selected. 4. Press the OK button to confirm the new settings. Manual Tuning 1. Press function button 2. 2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to tune down or up the waveband in small increments or press and hold to increment quickly, until you find a station you want to listen to. 3. Press OK to continue listening to a station. Waveband Button Scan Tuning Press the RADIO button to select from the wavebands available. Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds of each station detected. 199 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Traffic Information Control 1. Press function button 3. 2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or down the selected waveband. 3. Press function button 3 again or OK to continue listening to a station. Many stations that broadcast on the FM waveband have a TP code to signify that they carry traffic program information. Station Preset Buttons Turning Traffic Announcements On and Off This feature allows you to store your favorite stations, they can be recalled by selecting the appropriate waveband and pressing one of the preset buttons. Before you can receive traffic announcements, you must press either the TA or TRAFFIC button. A TA display will appear to show the feature is switched on. 1. Select a waveband. 2. Tune to the station required. 3. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A progress bar and message will appear. When the progress bar completes the station has been stored. The audio unit will also mute momentarily as confirmation. If you are already tuned to a station that broadcasts traffic information, TP will also be displayed. Otherwise the unit will search for a traffic program. You can repeat this on each waveband and for each preset button. If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled using a preset button, the audio unit will remain on that station unless TA or TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again. When traffic information is broadcast, it will automatically interrupt normal radio or CD playback and Traffic announcement will appear in the display. Note: When you drive to another part of the country, stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies, and are stored on preset buttons, may be updated with the correct frequency and station name for that area. Note: If traffic announcement is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non traffic announcement station no traffic announcement will be heard. Note: When you are listening to a non traffic announcement station and turn traffic announcement off and on again a TP seek will occur. Autostore Control Note: This will store up to a maximum of the 10 strongest signals available, either from the AM or the FM waveband, and overwrite the previously stored stations. You can also store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands. • • Traffic Announcement Volume Traffic announcements interrupt normal broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is usually louder than normal listening volumes. Press and hold the RADIO button. When the search is complete, sound is restored and the strongest signals are stored on the autostore presets. To adjust the preset volume: • 200 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Use the volume control to make the necessary adjustment during an incoming traffic announcement broadcast. The display will show the level selected. Audio System Ending Traffic Announcements Alternative Frequencies The audio unit will return to normal operation at the end of each traffic announcement. To end the announcement prematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC during the announcement. The majority of programs that broadcast on the FM waveband have a program identification code, it can be recognized by audio units. When your vehicle moves from one transmission area to another with the alternative frequencies tuning switched on, this function will search for the strongest station signal. Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any other time it will switch all announcements off. Automatic Volume Control Under certain conditions, alternative frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt normal reception. When available, automatic volume control adjusts the volume level to compensate for engine noise and road speed noise. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When selected, the unit continually evaluates signal strength and, if a better signal becomes available, the unit will switch to that alternative. It mutes while it checks a list of alternative frequencies and if necessary, it will search once across the selected waveband for a genuine alternative frequency. Press the MENU button and select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL. Use the left or right arrow button to adjust the setting. Press the OK button to confirm your selection. Press the MENU button to return. It will restore radio reception when it finds one or if one is not found, the unit will return to the original stored frequency. News Broadcasts When selected, AF will be shown in the display. Your audio unit may interrupt normal reception to broadcast news bulletins from stations on the FM waveband, radio data system or other enhanced network linked stations. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. or ALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. The display will indicate there is an incoming announcement, during news broadcasts. When the audio unit interrupts for a news broadcast the preset volume level will be the same as traffic announcements. Regional Mode Regional mode controls the behavior of alternative frequencies switching between regionally related networks of a parent broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly large network across a large part of the country. At various times of the day this 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. 201 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System large network may be broken down into a number of smaller regional networks, typically centered on major towns or cities. When the network is not split into regional variants, the whole network caries the same programming. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/NAVIGATION SYSTEM Regional mode ON: This prevents random alternative frequency switches when neighboring regional networks are not carrying the same programming. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. WARNING Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger coverage area if neighboring regional networks are carrying the same programming, but can cause random alternative frequency switches if they are not. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Note: An integrated multi function display is situated above the unit. This shows important information regarding control of your system. Additionally, there are various icons placed around the display screen which light up when a function is active (for example CD, Radio or Aux.) 202 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System A Eject: Press the button to eject a CD. B Cursor arrows: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices. C CD slot: Where you insert a CD. D OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections. E INFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB, IPod and Navigation information. If Navigation has been selected, pressing this button will show details of your current location or journey. F MAP Press the button to enter the map screen. See Navigation (page 230). G MENU Press the button to access different audio system features. H Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. I Function button 4: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. 203 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System J Function button 3: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. K Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next track on a CD. L On, Off and Volume: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off. Turn the dial to adjust the volume. M Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the previous track on a CD. N Function button 2: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. O Function button 1: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. P PHONE: Press the button to access the phone feature of the SYNC system by pressing PHONE then MENU. See separate manual. Q AUX: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. R RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. S CD: Press the button to change source to CD, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. T NAV Press the button to access the navigation system. 204 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Manual Tuning 1. Press function button 2. 2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to tune down or up the waveband in small increments or press and hold to increment quickly, until you find a station you want to listen to. 3. Press OK to continue listening to a station. Scan Tuning Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds of each station detected. A 1. Press function button 3. 2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or down the selected waveband. 3. Press function button 3 again or OK to continue listening to a station. Descriptions for function buttons 1-4 Station Preset Buttons Function buttons 1 to 4 are context dependent, and change according to the current unit mode. The description for the current function displays in the screen. This feature allows you to store your favorite stations, they can be recalled by selecting the appropriate waveband and pressing one of the preset buttons. Waveband Button 1. Select a waveband. 2. Tune to the station required. 3. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A progress bar and message will appear. When the progress bar completes the station has been stored. The audio unit will also mute momentarily as confirmation. Press the RADIO button to select from the wavebands available. You can use the selector to return to radio reception when you have been listening to another source. Alternatively, press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands. Scroll to the required waveband and press OK. You can repeat this on each waveband and for each preset button. Station Tuning Control Note: When you drive to another part of the country, stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies, and are stored on preset buttons, may be updated with the correct frequency and station name for that area. Seek Tuning Select a waveband and briefly press one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen. 205 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Autostore Control Traffic Announcement Volume Note: This will store up to a maximum of the 10 strongest signals available, either from the AM or the FM waveband, and overwrite the previously stored stations. You can also store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands. Traffic announcements interrupt normal broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is usually louder than normal listening volumes. • • To adjust the preset volume: • Press and hold the RADIO button. When the search is complete, sound is restored and the strongest signals are stored on the autostore presets. Use the volume control to make the necessary adjustment during an incoming traffic announcement broadcast. The display will show the level selected. Traffic Information Control Ending Traffic Announcements Many stations that broadcast on the FM waveband have a TP code to signify that they carry traffic program information. The audio unit will return to normal operation at the end of each traffic announcement. To end the announcement prematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC during the announcement. Turning Traffic Announcements On and Off Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any other time it will switch all announcements off. Before you can receive traffic announcements, you must press either the TA or TRAFFIC button. A TA display will appear to show the feature is switched on. Automatic Volume Control If you are already tuned to a station that broadcasts traffic information, TP will also be displayed. Otherwise the unit will search for a traffic program. When available, automatic volume control adjusts the volume level to compensate for engine noise and road speed noise. 1. Press the MENU button and select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 2. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL. 3. Use the left or right arrow button to adjust the setting. 4. Press the OK button to confirm your selection. When traffic information is broadcast, it will automatically interrupt normal radio or CD playback and Traffic announcement will appear in the display. If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled using a preset button, the audio unit will remain on that station unless TA or TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again. 5. Press the MENU button to return. Note: If traffic announcement is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non traffic announcement station no traffic announcement will be heard. News Broadcasts Your audio unit may interrupt normal reception to broadcast news bulletins from stations on the FM waveband, radio data system or other enhanced network linked stations. Note: When you are listening to a non traffic announcement station and turn traffic announcement off and on again a TP seek will occur. 206 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System The display will indicate there is an incoming announcement, during news broadcasts. When the audio unit interrupts for a news broadcast the preset volume level will be the same as traffic announcements. 3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. or ALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Regional Mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Regional mode controls the behavior of alternative frequencies switching between regionally related networks of a parent broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly large network across a large part of the country. At various times of the day this large network may be broken down into a number of smaller regional networks, typically centered on major towns or cities. When the network is not split into regional variants, the whole network carries the same programming. Alternative Frequencies The majority of programs that broadcast on the FM waveband have a program identification code, it can be recognized by audio units. Regional mode ON: This prevents random alternative frequency switches when neighboring regional networks are not carrying the same programming. When your vehicle moves from one transmission area to another with the alternative frequencies tuning switched on, this function will search for the strongest station signal. Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger coverage area if neighboring regional networks are carrying the same programming, but can cause random alternative frequency switches if they are not. Under certain conditions, alternative frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt normal reception. When selected, the unit continually evaluates signal strength and, if a better signal becomes available, the unit will switch to that alternative. It mutes while it checks a list of alternative frequencies and if necessary, it will search once across the selected waveband for a genuine alternative frequency. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. It will restore radio reception when it finds one or if one is not found, the unit will return to the original stored frequency. When selected, AF will be shown in the display. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 207 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Note: An integrated multi function display is situated above the unit. This shows important information regarding control of your system. Additionally, there are various icons placed around the display screen which light up when a function is active (for example CD, Radio or Aux.) AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AM/FM/CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 208 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System A On, Off: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off. B DISPLAY: Press the button to turn on the display into idle mode. C Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. In CD mode, press a number to select a track. In phone mode, use the buttons to dial a phone number. D CD slot: Where you insert a CD. E Cursor arrows: Press the button to scroll through on-screen choices. F Digital signal processing: Press the button to access the digital signal processing functions. G Eject: Press the button to eject a CD. H INFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB and IPod information. I CLOCK: Press the button to access the clock functions. J Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next track on a CD when in CD mode. In phone mode, use the button to end a phone call. An incoming call can be rejected. K MUTE: Press the button to turn the sound off, press again to turn the sound on. L TA: Press the button to turn traffic announcements on or off and cancels announcements during an active announcement. M Function button 4: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. N SOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle, balance and fade. O Function button 3: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. P OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections. Q Function button 2: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. R MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features. S Function button 1: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. T PHONE: Press the button to access the phone feature of the SYNC system by pressing PHONE then MENU. See separate manual. U AUX: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. 209 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System V Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the previous track on a CD, When in CD mode. In phone mode use the button to begin a phone call. An incoming phone call can be accepted. W RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. X CD: Press the button to change source to CD, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. Y Volume: Turn the dial to adjust the volume. 3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to make the necessary adjustment. The display indicates the level selected. 4. Press the OK button to confirm the new settings. Waveband Button Press the RADIO button to select from the wavebands available. You can use the selector to return to radio reception when you have been listening to another source. Alternatively, press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands. Scroll to the required waveband and press OK. Station Tuning Control A Descriptions for function buttons 1-4 DAB Service Linking Note: The system does not automatically turn on every time you switch the ignition on. Function buttons 1 to 4 are context dependent, and change according to the current unit mode. The description for the current function displays in the screen. Note: Service linking allows cross-referencing to other corresponding frequencies of the same station, for example FM and other DAB ensembles. Sound Button This will allow you to adjust the sound settings (for example bass, middle and treble). Note: The system will automatically change to another corresponding station if the current one becomes unavailable, for example when leaving the coverage area. 1. Press the SOUND button. 2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the required setting. Switching DAB service linking on and off. See General Information (page 63). 210 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Seek Tuning Select a waveband and briefly press one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen. Note: When you drive to another part of the country, stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies, and are stored on preset buttons, may be updated with the correct frequency and station name for that area. Manual Tuning Autostore Control 1. Press function button 2. 2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to tune down or up the waveband in small increments or press and hold to increment quickly, until you find a station you want to listen to. 3. Press OK to continue listening to a station. Note: This will store up to a maximum of the 10 strongest signals available, either from the AM or the FM waveband, and overwrite the previously stored stations. You can also store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands. Note: You must select either FM AST or AM AST to use this function. • • Scan Tuning Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds of each station detected. 1. Press function button 3. 2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or down the selected waveband. 3. Press function button 3 again or OK to continue listening to a station. Traffic Information Control Many stations that broadcast on the FM waveband have a TP code to signify that they carry traffic program information. Turning Traffic Announcements On and Off Station Preset Buttons This feature allows you to store your favorite stations, they can be recalled by selecting the appropriate waveband and pressing one of the preset buttons. Before you can receive traffic announcements, you must press either the TA or TRAFFIC button. A TA display will appear to show the feature is switched on. 1. Select a waveband. 2. Tune to the station required. 3. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A progress bar and message will appear. When the progress bar completes the station has been stored. The audio unit will also mute momentarily as confirmation. If you are already tuned to a station that broadcasts traffic information, TP will also be displayed. Otherwise the unit will search for a traffic program. When traffic information is broadcast, it will automatically interrupt normal radio or CD playback and Traffic announcement will appear in the display. You can repeat this on each waveband and for each preset button. If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled using a preset button, the audio unit will remain on that station unless TA or TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again. 211 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Press and hold the RADIO button. When the search is complete, sound is restored and the strongest signals are stored on the autostore presets. Audio System Note: If traffic announcement is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non traffic announcement station no traffic announcement will be heard. 6. Press the MENU button to return. Digital Signal Processing Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Note: When you are listening to a non traffic announcement station and turn traffic announcement off and on again a TP seek will occur. This feature takes into account the differences in distance from the various speakers in your vehicle to each seat. You must select the correct sitting position for the audio to be correctly set. Traffic Announcement Volume Traffic announcements interrupt normal broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is usually louder than normal listening volumes. Digital Signal Processing Equalizer Select the music category that most suits your listening preference. The audio output will change to enhance the particular style of music chosen. To adjust the preset volume: • Use the volume control to make the necessary adjustment during an incoming traffic announcement broadcast. The display will show the level selected. Changing the Digital Signal Processing Settings Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any other time it will switch all announcements off. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to the required digital signal processing function. 4. Press the OK button. 5. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the required setting. 6. Press the OK button to confirm your selection. 7. Press the MENU button to return. Automatic Volume Control News Broadcasts When available, automatic volume control adjusts the volume level to compensate for engine noise and road speed noise. Your audio unit may interrupt normal reception to broadcast news bulletins from stations on the FM waveband, radio data system or other enhanced network linked stations. Ending Traffic Announcements The audio unit will return to normal operation at the end of each traffic announcement. To end the announcement prematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC during the announcement. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL. 4. Use the left or right arrow button to adjust the setting. 5. Press the OK button to confirm your selection. The display will indicate there is an incoming announcement, during news broadcasts. When the audio unit interrupts for a news broadcast the preset volume level will be the same as traffic announcements. 1. 212 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Press the MENU button. Audio System Regional Mode 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Regional mode controls the behavior of alternative frequencies switching between regionally related networks of a parent broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly large network across a large part of the country. At various times of the day this large network may be broken down into a number of smaller regional networks, typically centered on major towns or cities. When the network is not split into regional variants, the whole network carries the same programming. Alternative Frequencies The majority of programs that broadcast on the FM waveband have a program identification code, it can be recognized by audio units. When your vehicle moves from one transmission area to another with the alternative frequencies tuning switched on, this function will search for the strongest station signal. Regional mode ON: This prevents random alternative frequency switches when neighboring regional networks are not carrying the same programming. Under certain conditions, however, alternative frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt normal reception. Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger coverage area if neighboring regional networks are carrying the same programming, but can cause 'random' alternative frequency switches if they are not. When selected, the unit continually evaluates signal strength and, if a better signal becomes available, the unit will switch to that alternative. It mutes while it checks a list of alternative frequencies and if necessary, it will search once across the selected waveband for a genuine alternative frequency. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. It will restore radio reception when it finds one or if one is not found, the unit will return to the original stored frequency. When selected, AF will be shown in the display. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. or ALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. 213 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Note: An integrated multi function display is situated above the unit. This shows important information regarding control of your system. Additionally, there are various icons placed around the display screen which light up when a function is active (for example CD, Radio or Aux.) AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: NAVIGATION SYSTEM/SONY AM/FM/CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 214 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System A On, Off: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off. B NAV: Press the button to access the navigation system. C Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. In CD mode, press a number to select a track. In phone mode, use the buttons to dial a phone number. D CD slot: Where you insert a CD. E Cursor arrows: Press the button to scroll through on-screen choices. F MAP: Press the button to access map features. G Eject: Press the button to eject a CD. H INFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB, IPod and Navigation information. If Navigation has been selected, pressing this button will show details of your current location or journey. I CLOCK: Press the button to access the clock functions. J Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next track on a CD when in CD mode. In phone mode, use the button to end a phone call. An incoming call can be rejected. K HOME: Press the button to access the address menu, to start navigating to your home address or to change your home address. L TRAFFIC: Press the button to turn traffic announcements on or off and cancel an active announcement. If Navigation has been selected, pressing this button takes you to the traffic menu. M Function button 4: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. N SOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle, balance and fade. O Function button 3: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. P OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections. Q Function button 2: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. R MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features. S Function button 1: Press the button to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in. T PHONE: Press the button to access the phone feature of the SYNC system by pressing PHONE then MENU. See separate manual. U AUX: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. 215 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System V Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the previous track on a CD, when in CD mode. In phone mode use the button to begin a phone call. An incoming phone call can be accepted. W RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. X CD: Press the button to change source to CD, it will also cancel the menu or list browsing. Y Volume: Turn the dial to adjust the volume. 3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to make the necessary adjustment. The display indicates the level selected. 4. Press the OK button to confirm the new settings. Waveband Button Press the RADIO button to select from the wavebands available. You can use the selector to return to radio reception when you have been listening to another source. Alternatively, press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands. Scroll to the required waveband and press OK. Station Tuning Control A Descriptions for function buttons 1-4 DAB Service Linking Note: The system does not automatically turn on every time you switch the ignition on. Function buttons 1 to 4 are context dependent, and change according to the current unit mode. The description for the current function displays in the screen. Note: Service linking allows cross-referencing to other corresponding frequencies of the same station, for example FM and other DAB ensembles. Sound Button This will allow you to adjust the sound settings (for example bass, middle and treble). Note: The system will automatically change to another corresponding station if the current one becomes unavailable, for example when leaving the coverage area. 1. Press the SOUND button. 2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the required setting. Switching DAB service linking on and off. See General Information (page 63). 216 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Seek Tuning Select a waveband and briefly press one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen. Note: When you drive to another part of the country, stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies, and are stored on preset buttons, may be updated with the correct frequency and station name for that area. Manual Tuning Autostore Control 1. Press function button 2. 2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to tune down or up the waveband in small increments or press and hold to increment quickly, until you find a station you want to listen to. 3. Press OK to continue listening to a station. Note: This will store up to a maximum of the 10 strongest signals available, either from the AM or the FM waveband, and overwrite the previously stored stations. You can also store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands. Note: You must select either FM AST or AM AST to use this function. • • Scan Tuning Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds of each station detected. 1. Press function button 3. 2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or down the selected waveband. 3. Press function button 3 again or OK to continue listening to a station. Traffic Information Control Many stations that broadcast on the FM waveband have a TP code to signify that they carry traffic program information. Turning Traffic Announcements On and Off Station Preset Buttons This feature allows you to store your favorite stations, they can be recalled by selecting the appropriate waveband and pressing one of the preset buttons. Before you can receive traffic announcements, you must press either the TA or TRAFFIC button. A TA display will appear to show the feature is switched on. 1. Select a waveband. 2. Tune to the station required. 3. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A progress bar and message will appear. When the progress bar completes the station has been stored. The audio unit will also mute momentarily as confirmation. If you are already tuned to a station that broadcasts traffic information, TP will also be displayed. Otherwise the unit will search for a traffic program. When traffic information is broadcast, it will automatically interrupt normal radio or CD playback and Traffic announcement will appear in the display. You can repeat this on each waveband and for each preset button. If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled using a preset button, the audio unit will remain on that station unless TA or TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again. 217 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Press and hold the RADIO button. When the search is complete, sound is restored and the strongest signals are stored on the autostore presets. Audio System Note: If traffic announcement is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non traffic announcement station no traffic announcement will be heard. 6. Press the MENU button to return. Digital Signal Processing Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Note: When you are listening to a non traffic announcement station and turn traffic announcement off and on again a TP seek will occur. This feature takes into account the differences in distance from the various speakers in your vehicle to each seat. You must select the correct sitting position for the audio to be correctly set. Traffic Announcement Volume Traffic announcements interrupt normal broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is usually louder than normal listening volumes. Digital Signal Processing Equalizer Select the music category that most suits your listening preference. The audio output will change to enhance the particular style of music chosen. To adjust the preset volume: • Use the volume control to make the necessary adjustment during an incoming traffic announcement broadcast. The display will show the level selected. Changing the Digital Signal Processing Settings Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any other time it will switch all announcements off. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to the required digital signal processing function. 4. Press the OK button. 5. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the required setting. 6. Press the OK button to confirm your selection. 7. Press the MENU button to return. Automatic Volume Control News Broadcasts When available, automatic volume control adjusts the volume level to compensate for engine noise and road speed noise. Your audio unit may interrupt normal reception to broadcast news bulletins from stations on the FM waveband, radio data system or other enhanced network linked stations. Ending Traffic Announcements The audio unit will return to normal operation at the end of each traffic announcement. To end the announcement prematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC during the announcement. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL. 4. Use the left or right arrow button to adjust the setting. 5. Press the OK button to confirm your selection. The display will indicate there is an incoming announcement, during news broadcasts. When the audio unit interrupts for a news broadcast the preset volume level will be the same as traffic announcements. 1. 218 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Press the MENU button. Audio System Regional Mode 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Regional mode controls the behavior of alternative frequencies switching between regionally related networks of a parent broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly large network across a large part of the country. At various times of the day this large network may be broken down into a number of smaller regional networks, typically centered on major towns or cities. When the network is not split into regional variants, the whole network carries the same programming. Alternative Frequencies The majority of programs that broadcast on the FM waveband have a program identification code, it can be recognized by audio units. When your vehicle moves from one transmission area to another with the alternative frequencies tuning switched on, this function will search for the strongest station signal. Regional mode ON: This prevents random alternative frequency switches when neighboring regional networks are not carrying the same programming. Under certain conditions, however, alternative frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt normal reception. Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger coverage area if neighboring regional networks are carrying the same programming, but can cause random alternative frequency switches if they are not. When selected, the unit continually evaluates signal strength and, if a better signal becomes available, the unit will switch to that alternative. It mutes while it checks a list of alternative frequencies and if necessary, it will search once across the selected waveband for a genuine alternative frequency. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. It will restore radio reception when it finds one or if one is not found, the unit will return to the original stored frequency. When selected, AF will be shown in the display. AUDIO SYSTEM SECURITY 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. or ALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or off with the OK button. 4. Press the MENU button to return. Each unit incorporates a unique code that is linked to the vehicle identification number. The system will automatically check that the audio unit and vehicle match before allowing operation. If a security code message appears, see an authorized dealer. DIGITAL AUDIO The system allows you to listen to DAB (Digital Audio Broadcast) radio stations. 219 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Seek Tuning Note: Coverage differs from region to region and will influence the quality of reception. It is broadcast nationwide, regionally and locally. 1. The following formats are supported: • DAB • DAB+ • DMB-Audio (Digital Multimedia Broadcasting). Radio Station List This feature displays all the available radio stations in a list. 1. Press function button 1. 2. Press the left or right arrow buttons to change ensembles. Press the up or down arrow button to navigate to your required radio station. 3. Press OK to confirm your selection. Note: The display will only show radio stations in the current ensemble. Ensembles Ensembles contain a group of radio stations. Each ensemble can consist of several different radio stations. The radio station name displays below the ensemble name. Note: When you tune from one ensemble to another, it can take a while until the system synchronizes to the next ensemble. The system mutes during synchronization. Manual Tuning 1. Press function button 2. 2. Press the left or right arrow button to tune up or down the waveband in small increments. Press and hold to move through the waveband quickly. 3. Press OK to confirm your selection. Note: Seek tuning is also possible within this screen. Selecting Radio Band DAB1 and DAB2 operate in the same way. You can store up to 10 different presets on each band. 1. Press the RADIO button. 2. Press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands. 3. Select DAB1 or DAB2. Radio Station Preset Buttons This feature allows you to store up to 10 favorite radio stations from any ensemble in each preset bank. Radio Station Tuning Control 1. Select a radio station. 2. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A progress bar and message will appear. When the progress bar completes the radio station has been stored. The system will mute momentarily as confirmation. Press the RADIO button and select DAB1 or DAB2. Both preset banks operate in the same way and can store up to 10 different preset radio stations. Note: When you reach the first or last radio station within an ensemble, further tuning will skip to the next ensemble. There may be a delay during this change and the audio will briefly mute. Once stored press a preset button at any time to select a favourite radio station. 220 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Press a seek button. The system will stop at the first radio station it finds in the direction chosen. Audio System Track Selection Note: Radio stations stored on the preset buttons may not always be available if you have left the coverage area. The system will mute when this happens. • Press the seek down button once to replay the current track. If pressed within two seconds of the start of a track, the previous track will be selected. • Press the up or down arrow buttons to select the required track, then press the OK button. Radio Text You can display extra information. For example; artist name. To switch this option on, select a radio station and press function button 3. Note: Extra information may not always be available. Fast Forward and Reverse Press and hold the seek down or up buttons to search backward or forward within the tracks on the disc. Service Linking If you leave the coverage area of a DAB radio station the system will automatically switch to the corresponding FM radio station. Shuffle and Random Random track playback, also known as shuffle, plays all tracks on the CD in random order. You can switch this feature on and off using the information display. See General Information (page 63). 1. Press the MENU button and select CD MODE. 2. Select SHUFFLE. This enables the function to be switched on or off. Note: If a DAB radio station has no corresponding FM radio station, the audio will mute when attempting to switch. Note: The system will display the FM symbol when DAB and FM radio stations link. When an MP3 CD is playing, options include SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or to play all the tracks in the folder in a random order. COMPACT DISC PLAYER VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD Repeat Compact Disc Tracks 1. Press the MENU button and select CD MODE. 2. Select REPEAT. This enables the function to be switched on or off. The track will replay once ended. Compact Disc Playback Note: During playback, the display indicates the disc, track and time that has elapsed since the start of the track. When an MP3 or WMA CD is playing, options include REPEAT for the track, or to repeat all the tracks in the folder. During radio reception, press the CD button once to start CD playback. After a disc is loaded, playback will start immediately. Compact Disc Track Scanning The SCAN function allows you to preview each track for approximately five seconds. 221 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Various scan modes are possible, according to the type of CD currently playing. For Joliet or Romeo in the expansion format, consider these restrictions when configuring your CD writing software. 1. Multi Session Press the MENU button and select CD MODE. 2. Select SCAN. This enables the function to be switched on or off. Note: When an MP3 or WMA CD is playing, options include SCAN for the CD or just the tracks in the folder. This is a recording method that enables adding of data using the track-at-once method. Conventional CDs begin at a CD control area called the lead-in and end at an area called lead-out. A multi session CD is a CD having multiple sessions, with each segment from lead-in to lead-out regarded as a single session. 3. Press the OK button to stop the scan mode. MP3 and WMA File Playback CD-Extra: The format that records audio (audio CD data) as tracks on session 1, and records data as tracks on session 2. MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3) or WMA (Windows media audio) is a standard technology and format for compressing audio data. This allows a more efficient use of the media. Mixed CD: In this format, data is recorded as track 1 and audio (audio CD data) is recorded as track 2. You can play MP3 files recorded on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW formats. The disc must be in the ISO 9660 level 1 or level 2 format, or Joliet or Romeo in the expansion format. You can also use a disc recorded in multi session. File Formats With formats other than ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2, folder names or file names may not be displayed correctly. ISO 9660 Format When naming, be sure to add the file extension .MP3 or .WMA to the file name. This is the most common international standard for the logical format of files and folders on a CD-ROM. If you put the extension .MP3 or .WMA to a file other than MP3 or WMA, the unit cannot recognize the file correctly and will generate random noise that could damage your speakers. There are several specification levels. In Level 1, file names must be in the 8.3 format (no more than eight characters in the name, no more than three characters in the extension .MP3 and .WMA) and in capital letters. The following discs take a longer time to start playback. • Folder names can be no longer than eight characters. There can be no more than eight folder levels (trees). Level 2 specifications allow file names up to 31 characters long. • • Each folder can have up to eight trees. 222 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 A disc recorded with complicated tree structure. A disc recorded in multi session. A non-finalized disc to which data can be added. Audio System Playing a Multi Session Disc When the first track of the first session is audio CD data only, the audio CD data of the first session is played back. Non-audio CD data, MP3 or WMA file information (track number, time, etc.) is displayed with no sound. When the first track of the first session is not audio CD data: • • If an MP3 or WMA file is on the disc, only MP3, WMA or other data is skipped. Audio CD data is not recognized. If no MP3 or WMA file is in the disc, nothing is played back. Audio CD data is not recognized. MP3 and WMA Files Playback Order ID3 Tag Version 2 The playback order of the folders and files are as shown. The following occurs when an MP3 or WMA file containing a tag is played: Note: A folder that does not include an MP3 or WMA file is skipped. • To specify a desired playback order before the folder or file name. Input the order by number (e.g., 01, 02) then record contents onto a disc. The order differs depending on the writing software. • • 223 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 When skipping a portion of a tag (at the beginning of the track) there is no sound output. Skip time changes depending the tag capacity. Example: At 64 kbytes, it is about 2 seconds (with RealJukebox). The displayed elapsed playing time when skipping a portion of the tag is inaccurate. For MP3 files of a bit rate other than 128 kbps, time is not displayed accurately during playback. When an MP3 file is created with MP3 conversion software (e.g. RealJukebox - a registered trademark of RealNetworks Inc), the tag will automatically be written. Audio System MP3 or WMA Navigation CD Text Display Options MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD in several ways. They can all be placed in the root directory like a conventional audio CD, or they can be placed in folders that may represent, for example, an album, artist, or genre. When an audio disc with CD text is playing, limited information encoded in each track can be displayed. Such information will normally include: • • • The normal playing sequence on CDs with multiple folders is: • • • Note: These display options are selected in the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISC NAME or NO TRACK NAME will be shown in the display if no information has been encoded. Play the tracks within the root (top level) first Then the tracks in any folder(s) within the root Then move onto the second folder, and so forth. Ending Compact Disc Playback To navigate to a track. To restore radio reception on all units, press the RADIO button. 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons to enter the track list. 2. Navigate the hierarchy using the arrow buttons to select another folder or track (file). 3. Press OK to select a highlighted track. Note: The CD will not be ejected. The disc will pause at the point where radio reception was restored. To resume CD playback, press the CD button again. MP3 and WMA Display Options COMPACT DISC PLAYER VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/BLUETOOTH/SONY AM/FM/CD When an MP3 or WMA disc is playing, certain information encoded in each track can be displayed. Such information will normally include: • • • The file name. The folder name. ID3 information which might be the album or artist’s name. Compact Disc Playback Note: During playback, the display indicates the disc, track and time that have elapsed since the start of the track. The unit will normally show the file name that is playing. To select one of the other items of information, press the INFO button repeatedly until the required item is shown in the display. During radio reception, press CD once to start CD playback. After a disc is loaded, playback starts immediately. Note: If the ID3 information selected is unavailable, NO MP3 or WMA TAG will be shown in the display. 224 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 The disc name. The artist name. The track name. Audio System Track Selection • Press the seek down button once to replay the current track. If pressed within two seconds of the start of a track, the previous track plays. • Press the up or down arrow buttons to select the required track, then press OK. Note: When an MP3 or WMA CD is playing, you can have the system scan tracks on the CD or within the current folder. Pressing function button 3 toggles these options. MP3 and WMA File Playback MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3) or WMA (Windows media audio) is a standard technology and format for compressing audio data. This allows a more efficient use of the media. You can select a track by using the numeric keypad. Dial the required track number until complete (for example, 1 then 2 for track 12), or dial the number and directly press OK. You can play MP3 files recorded on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW formats. The disc must be in the ISO 9660 level 1 or level 2 format, or Joliet or Romeo in the expansion format. You can also use a disc recorded in multi session. Fast Forward and Reverse Press and hold the seek down or up buttons to search backward or forward within the tracks on the disc. ISO 9660 Format This is the most common international standard for the logical format of files and folders on a CD-ROM. Shuffle and Random Random track playback, also known as shuffle, plays all tracks on the CD in random order. There are several specification levels. In Level 1, file names must be in the 8.3 format (no more than eight characters in the name, no more than three characters in the extension .MP3 and .WMA) and in capital letters. Press function button 2. Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can have the system shuffle tracks for the whole CD, or within the current folder. Pressing function button 2 toggles these options. Folder names can be no longer than eight characters. There can be no more than eight folder levels (trees). Level 2 specifications allow file names up to 31 characters long. Use the seek up or down button to select the next track to shuffle, if required. Repeat Compact Disc Tracks Each folder can have up to eight trees. Press function button 1. For Joliet or Romeo in the expansion format, consider these restrictions when configuring your CD writing software. Note: When an MP3 or WMA CD is playing, you can have the system repeat the current track or all tracks within the current folder. Pressing function button 1 toggles these options. Multi Session This recording method enables adding of data using the track-at-once method. Compact Disc Track Scanning Press function button 3. 225 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System Conventional CDs begin at a CD control area called the lead-in and end at an area called lead-out. A multi session CD is a CD having multiple sessions, with each segment from lead-in to lead-out regarded as a single session. • • CD-Extra: The format that records audio (audio CD data) as tracks on session 1, and records data as tracks on session 2. If an MP3 or WMA file is on the disc, the system skips these file and other data. Audio CD data is not recognized. If no MP3 or WMA file is in the disc, nothing plays. Audio CD data is not recognized. MP3 and WMA Files Playback Order The playback order of the folders and files are as shown. Mixed CD: In this format, data records as track 1 and audio (audio CD data) records as track 2. Note: The system skips any folder that does not include an MP3 or WMA file. To specify a desired playback order before the folder or file name, input the order by number (for example, 01 or 02) then record the contents onto a disc. The order differs depending on the writing software. File Formats With formats other than ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2, folder names or file names may not display correctly. When naming, be sure to add the file extension .MP3 or .WMA to the file name. If you put the extension .MP3 or .WMA to a file other than MP3 or WMA, the unit cannot recognize the file correctly and generates random noise that could damage your speakers. The following discs take a longer time to start playback. • • • A disc recorded with complicated tree structure. A disc recorded in multi session. A non-finalized disc, where you can add more data. Playing a Multi Session Disc When the first track of the first session is audio CD data only, the audio CD data of the first session plays. Non-audio CD data, MP3 or WMA file information (such as track number and time) displays with no sound. ID3 Tag Version 2 The following occurs when an MP3 or WMA file containing a tag plays: When the first track of the first session is not audio CD data: 226 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System • • • MP3 and WMA Display Options When skipping a portion of a tag (at the beginning of the track) there is no sound output. Skip time changes depending on the tag capacity. Example: At 64 kbytes, it is about 2 seconds (with RealJukebox). The displayed elapsed playing time when skipping a portion of the tag is inaccurate. For MP3 files of a bit rate other than 128 kbps, time does not display accurately during playback. When an MP3 file is created with MP3 conversion software (such as RealJukebox - a registered trademark of RealNetworks Inc.), the tag generates automatically. When an MP3 or WMA disc is playing, certain information encoded in each track can display. Such information normally includes: • • • The unit normally shows the file name that is playing. To select one of the other items of information, press INFO repeatedly until the required item appears in the display. Note: If the ID3 information selected is unavailable, NO MP3 or WMA TAG appears in the display. MP3 or WMA Navigation You can record MP3 tracks on the CD in several ways. You can place them in the root directory like a conventional audio CD, or in folders that may represent categories, such as album, artist, or genre. CD Text Display Options When an audio disc with CD text is playing, limited information encoded in each track can display. Such information normally includes: The normal playing sequence on CDs with multiple folders is: • • • • • • Play the tracks within the root (top level) first Then the tracks in any folder(s) within the root Then move onto the second folder, and so forth. The disc name. The artist name. The track name. Note: You can select these display options in the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISC NAME or NO TRACK NAME appears in the display if there is no encoded information. To navigate to a track: 1. The file name. The folder name. ID3 information, which might be the album or artist name. Ending Compact Disc Playback Press the up or down arrow buttons to enter the track list. To restore radio reception on all units, press RADIO. 2. Navigate the hierarchy using the arrow buttons to select another folder or track (file). 3. Press OK to select a highlighted track. Note: The CD does not eject. The disc pauses at the point where radio reception returned. To resume CD playback, press CD again. 227 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Audio System The auxiliary input jack allows you to connect and play music from your portable music player through your vehicle speakers. You can use any portable music player designed for use with headphones. Your audio extension cable must have male one-eighth inch (three and one-half millimeter) connectors at each end. AUXILIARY INPUT JACK WARNINGS Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving. 6. Store the portable music player in a secure location, such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is in moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving. 7. 228 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Make sure your vehicle is stationary with the radio and portable music players turned off. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the auxiliary input jack. Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD. Adjust the volume as desired. Switch the portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its maximum level. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You should hear music from your device even if it is low. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls. Audio System AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING Audio unit display Rectification PLEASE CHECK CD General error message for CD fault conditions, such as cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make sure the disc is loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or replace disc with known music disc. If error persists contact your dealer. CD DRIVE MALFUNCTION General error message for CD fault conditions such as possible mechanism fault. CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until it has cooled down. 229 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Press the relevant button on the unit bezel to access the system functions. This will take you into the selected mode. For instructions on how to operate the audio unit and the available navigation features, see the relevant audio unit procedure. See Audio System (page 190). Loading Map Data WARNINGS The indicated maximum speed may not be applicable to your vehicle. It is always your responsibility to control your vehicle, supervise any system and obey the correct speed limit. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. 1. Load the navigation SD card into the slot. 2. Press the NAV button. The road safety warning confirms the map data import was successful. 3. The system is now ready to use. For map updates and system upgrades, see an authorized dealer. The front glass on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard object. If the glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact with the skin, wash immediately with soap and water. Note: You can only use Ford licensed data. Road Safety WARNING Note: Do not switch the ignition on or attempt to start the engine while the software is updating. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: Do not clean the unit with solvents or aerosol cleaning agents. Use only a damp cloth. Note: The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the navigation system. If you need a replacement SD card, see an authorized dealer. Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, push the card in and release it. Do not attempt to remove the card without first pushing it in. This could cause damage. 230 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Note: You are ultimately responsible for the safe operation of your vehicle and must evaluate whether it is safe to follow route suggestions. Navigation features are provided only as an aid. Driving decisions based on observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations must be observed. Do not follow route suggestions if they would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate due to errors, changes in roads, traffic or driving conditions. 5. After entering sufficient information, select Start guidance or press function key one to begin route calculation. Note: After first entry, the country selected will remain the default option until you manually change it. Safety Information Note: If you only need to navigate to a district, within a city for example, just enter the district name and start guidance. Note: If required you can select different character screens by using the up and down arrow buttons. Note: If you only need to navigate to a city center, just enter the city name and start guidance. If detailed viewing of route instructions is necessary, pull off the road when it is safe to do so and park your vehicle. The route is calculated and the screen returns to the main navigation screen. If prompted, select the type of route you require first. Follow the screen and voice prompts to reach your destination. Setting a Route 1. Press the NAV button. 2. Select Destination input. 3. Starting at the top, select the country followed by either the postcode or city and street name, together with the house number or intersection. 4. Use the arrow buttons to enter your address details. Menu Structure You can access the menu using the information and entertainment display control. See Information Displays (page 63). Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Navigation Active guidance * Route Route sections list Block next section Unblock rte sctn Destination input * Country City/postcode Street 231 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Navigation District Start guidance TA * Traffic TMC for route All TMC Block next section Route sections list Unblock rte sctn Home address Start guidance * Change address * Last destinations Favourites (A-Z) * Favourites * Points of interest POIs nearby Near destination Along motorway POIs near address Search by name * Tour planning New tour Stored tours * Store position * Route options Route Eco Fast Short Always ask Driver: Leisurely Normal 232 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Navigation Fast Eco settings Trailer Roof box Dynamic Motorway Tunnel Ferry/motorail Toll Seasonal roads Toll sticker * Special functions GPS info System info Enter position Demo mode * For a description on these menu items refer to the relevant table. Short Route Options Uses the shortest distance possible. Press the NAV button and scroll to Route options. You can then set your route options for any of the following. Driver Leisurely Route This option will calculate your time of arrival based on a leisurely drive to the destination. You can select Always ask to make sure that you are always given the choice of route option for your journey. Normal Eco This option will calculate your time of arrival based on a normal drive to the destination. Uses the most fuel efficient route. Note: Your driving style will influence this. Fast Uses the fastest route possible. 233 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Fast Ferries and Car Trains This option will calculate your time of arrival based on a fast drive to the destination. When switched off the system will avoid ferry crossings and car train facilities on your route and automatically update your route distance and timings. Eco Settings Toll Trailer When switched off the system will avoid toll roads on your route and automatically update your route distance and timings. Use this feature to change the economy settings of your journey relating to whether or not you are towing a trailer and if so the size of trailer being towed. Seasonal Roads Roof Box When switched off the system will avoid seasonal roads (for example, mountain passes) on your route and automatically update your route distance and timings. Use this feature to change the economy settings of your journey relating to the use of a roof box. Toll Sticker Dynamic When switched off the system will avoid toll routes and automatically update your route distance and timings. When switched on, and if the unit is receiving a valid traffic message channel signal, the route will be automatically updated to take into account real time traffic incidents or congestion. Information Press the information button to view details of your current location or journey. During active route guidance pressing this button will repeat the last navigation instruction. Note: This feature can be useful in avoiding delays or hold ups on journeys. Freeway When switched off the system will avoid freeways on your route and automatically update your route distance and timings. Setting Your Navigation Preferences Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route. Tunnel When switched off the system will avoid tunnels on your route and automatically update your route distance and timings. 234 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Press the NAV button and choose any of the following options. When You Select You Can Destination input Enter your destination details (for example enter city names, enter street names or pick a place from a map). Traffic Choose how you want the system to handle traffic problems along your route (for example, block sections on route). Home address See the location on the map currently stored as the home position. Only one entry can be saved as the home address. Last destinations Access a history of previous destinations entered in the system. Select the required repeat destination from the list. Favorites See a list of your saved favorites. Points of interest Search for and select points of interest nearby, on your route or at your destination. You can search by name or by category. Tour planning Set up and store a new tour by entering a number of different destinations and select the order in which you wish to visit them. You can also modify an existing tour or recall a previous tour. The system will automatically calculate and display your chosen journey. Store position Store and name your current position. This will automatically save in your favorites. Route options Set your route options from the available list. Special functions Select GPS and system information or a demonstration of the system functionality. Select a demonstration mode where the system will simulate a journey whilst the vehicle is stationary. You can manually select a vehicle start position. 235 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Press the MENU button, select the navigation option and choose any of the following options. When You Select You Can Route options Set your route options. Map display Customize the map display for your journey (for example arrows on map, arrival times and map content). Assistance options Customize display information for your journey (for example signs, lanes and speed limits). Turn the hazard warning feature on or off. Personal data Delete personal data (for example your home address). Reset all settings Reset the navigation settings. 3. Scroll to the required destination using the arrow buttons. 4. Press the OK button to start navigation. Storing Your Home Address 1. Press the NAV button. 2. Select the home address option. 3. Enter the required details using the arrow buttons. 4. Press the confirm function button. Note: You can display the current home address by pressing the information button. Adjusting the Navigation Voice Level You can adjust the voice prompt level during an active voice prompt by using the volume control. Note: During active route guidance pressing the information button will repeat the last navigation instruction. Note: Your last destination will automatically display if you go to change your home address. Nav Audio Mixing Adding a Favorite This feature allows you to adjust the volume mix between the audio unit and navigation voice level. See General Information (page 63). 1. Press the NAV button. 2. Scroll to the destination input option. 3. Enter the required details using the arrow buttons. 4. Press the store function button. Note: If you select store position, this will also save the destination in your favorites. Tolerant Destination Input This function will search a number of destinations with a similar spelling to what you have entered. This is helpful if you are unsure on how to spell a destination. Selecting a Favorite 1. Press the NAV button. 2. Scroll to the destination input option. 1. Press the NAV button. 2. Select the favorites option. 236 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation 3. Before entering your destination details select Tolerant and then begin to input your destination. 4. Press the OK button. The system will search for destinations with similar spellings. 5. Use the arrow buttons to select a destination from the list and press the OK button to confirm your destination. Manual: Press function button one and adjust the setting using the left or right arrow buttons. Press OK to confirm your setting. Auto: Press function button one and using the up or down arrow key select the auto option. Press OK to confirm your setting. Move When you are in map mode, press function button two. You can now use the arrow buttons on the audio unit to move around the map. Route Displays Map Display Press the MAP button to view map mode. This view will show your current location with your vehicle in the center shown as an arrow surrounded by a circle. The arrow will face in the direction of travel. Press function button two again to return to the original view. Navigation Display After commencing a navigation route, the default screen is the main navigation screen. The information on the top line gives the name of the current road, or the next road to take if a turn is approaching. Once an active route is underway, guidance will be given by on-screen information and voice prompts. Whichever audio source you wish to leave the unit in, basic turn by turn and distance information will remain on the screen in the form of a graphic inset. You do not need to leave the unit on the main navigation screen when you are navigating a route. Press the MAP button at any time to return to the main navigation screen. Slightly more detailed information on your route may be available using the main navigation screen if required. You can change the way the map is displayed by altering the zoom and orientation settings. Press function button one. The current map scale is shown on the display. Map scale settings may be set between 0.05 miles to 500 miles or 50 meters to 500 kilometers, with an auto setting on the top. The auto setting continuously changes the map scale according to vehicle speed and the road type being driven. You can use the arrow buttons to change the view to 2D, turn-by-turn, 3D or a clean view. Hazard Spot Warning The system supports a hazard spot warning feature which informs you with visible and audible feedback about hazardous traffic areas. You can switch the system on and off using the information and entertainment display menu. See Assistance options in the navigation menu. Zoom This feature will automatically increase the zoom on the map display at times when you are required to make a turn, or perform more complex maneuvers. Shortly after the zoom scale will return to the previous level when in auto mode. Note: This feature is only available in certain countries. 237 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Navigation Navigation Map Updates Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase. See an authorized dealer. Type Approvals SD Logo is a trademark. The navigation software is based in part on the work of the FreeType team © 2006 The navigation software is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group. 238 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ GENERAL INFORMATION SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and portable media player. • This allows you to: • Make and receive calls • Access and play music from your media player • Use Emergency Assistance • Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands • Stream music from your connected cell phone • Select pre-defined text messages Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. • Support For further support, see an authorized dealer. For more information, visit the regional Ford website. 239 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Use the advanced voice recognition system Charge your USB device (if your device supports this). SYNC™ Safety Information supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The cell phone profile, media player index and development log will remain in the system unless deleted. They are generally accessible in your vehicle only when you connect your cell phone or media player. If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you complete a master reset to erase all stored information. See Information Displays (page 63). When using SYNC: • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and cables where you cannot step on them or they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. Refer to your device's manual for further information. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer. Special equipment is required to access system data. Access to your vehicle's SYNC module is also required. We will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described without consent. Examples where system data can be accessed are for a court order, where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of us. Further privacy information is available. See SYNC™ Applications and Services (page 253). USING VOICE RECOGNITION Privacy Information This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the steering wheel and focus on what is around you. When a cell phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile that is linked to that cell phone. The system creates the profile to offer you more mobile features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your phonebook, text messages (read and unread) and call history. This will include the history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. If you connect a media player, the system creates and retains an index of Helpful Hints Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. 240 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish followed by a single beep. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can also cancel a voice session at any time by pressing and holding the voice button. Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. Initiating a Voice Session Press the voice button. A list of available commands appears in the display. Say If you want to "Bluetooth Audio" Stream audio from your cell phone. "Cancel" Cancel the requested action. "Line in" Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack. "Phone" Make calls. "SYNC" Return to the main menu. "USB" Access the device connected to your USB port. "Voice settings" Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback. "Help" Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode. The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time. System Interaction and Feedback The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and your chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback. Adjusting the Interaction Level Press the voice button. Say "Voice settings" when prompted, then any of the following: When you say The system "Interaction mode advanced" Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts. "Interaction mode standard" Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. The system defaults to the standard interaction mode. 241 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there is more than one possible response to your request. For example, the system may ask if the command phone is correct. Press the voice button to change the confirmation prompt setting. Say "Voice settings" when prompted, then any of the following: When you say The system "Confirmation prompts off" Makes a best guess from the command. You may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. "Confirmation prompts on" Clarifies your voice command with a short question. For example, say "one" after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say "two" after the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say "three" after the tone to call Jane Doe at home. The system creates suggestion lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice commands. When switched on, the system may prompt you with as many as four possibilities for clarification. The same logic applies to media content. For example, say, "one" after the tone to play John Doe. Say "two" after the tone to play Johnny Doe. Say "three" after the tone to play Jane Doe. When you say The system "Media candidate lists off" Makes a best guess from the media suggestion list. The system may occasionally ask you questions. "Media candidate lists on" Clarifies your voice command for media suggestions. "Phone candidate lists off" Makes a best guess from the cell phone suggestion list. The system may occasionally ask you questions. "Phone candidate lists on" Clarifies your voice command for cell phone suggestions. 2. Select SYNC-Settings. 3. Select Voice Settings. Changing the Voice Settings You can change the voice settings using the information and entertainment display. 1. Press the MENU button. 242 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ 3. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your cell phone to start the pairing process. 4. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR PHONE Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cell phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Using privacy mode. • Dialing a number. • Redialing. • Call waiting notification. • Caller ID. Depending on your cell phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current cell phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone the system automatically tries to connect with first when you switch the ignition on), downloading your phonebook, etc. Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones Note: You must switch the ignition and radio on. Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are cell phone dependent features. To check your cell phone's compatibility, refer to your device's manual or visit the regional Ford website. Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up or down arrows on your audio system. 1. Pairing a Cell Phone For the First Time 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: You must switch the ignition and radio on. Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up or down arrows on your audio system. 6. Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the system allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. 1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature on your cell phone is switched on before starting the search. Refer to your device's manual if necessary. 2. Press the PHONE button. When the audio display indicates that no phones are paired, select the option to add. 7. 243 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Make sure the Bluetooth feature on your cell phone is switched on before starting the search. Refer to your device's manual if necessary. Press the PHONE button. Select the option for Bluetooth devices. Press the OK button. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your device to start the pairing process. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. SYNC™ The system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current cell phone as the primary cell phone, downloading your phonebook, etc. Cell Phone Voice Commands "Phone" "Go to privacy" 1 "Call " "Call at home" 1 "Join" 1 "Call at work" 1 2,4 "Call in office" "Call on cell" "Menu" 1 2 "Phonebook " "Call on other" "Call history incoming" 1 2 2 "Call history missed" "Call history outgoing" "Hold" 2 "Phonebook at home" 2 "Phonebook in office" "Phonebook at work" 2 2 "Connections" 2 "Phonebook on cell" "Phonebook on other" 2 - 1,3 "Dial" 1 2 You do not need to say "phone" prior to these commands. 2 These commands are not available until your cell phone information has completely downloaded using Bluetooth. 3 See Dial table. 4 See Menu table. Phonebook Commands When you ask the system to access a phonebook name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the audio display. Press the voice button and say "call" to call the contact. 244 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ "Dial" "112" (one-one-two), etc. "700" (seven hundred) "800" (eight hundred) "900" (nine hundred) "Pound", (#) "Number <0-9>" "Asterisk" (*) "Clear" (deletes all entered digits) "Delete" (deletes one digit) "Plus" "Star" Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or any button on the audio unit. "Menu" "(Phone) connections" "(Phone) settings (message) notification off" "(Phone) settings (message) notification on" "(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer" "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1" "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2" "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3" "(Phone) settings (set) ringer off" "Phone name" "Text message inbox" Words in parenthesis are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command. 245 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Making a Call Receiving a Call 1. To erase the last spoken digit, say "delete" or press the left arrow button on the audio unit. To erase all spoken digits, say "clear" or press and hold the left arrow button on the audio unit. When receiving a call, you can: • Answer the call by pressing the accept call button on the steering wheel or by selecting the accept call option in the audio display. Press the OK button. • Reject the call by pressing the reject call button on the steering wheel or by selecting the reject call option in the audio display. Press the OK button. • Ignore the call by doing nothing. To end the call, press the end call button on the steering wheel or select the end call option in the audio display and press OK. Cell Phone Options During an Active Call Press the voice button and when prompted say "call " or "dial" followed by a number. 2. When the system confirms the number, say "dial" again to initiate the call. During an active call, you have extra menu features which become available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. To access this menu, choose one of the options available at the bottom of the audio display or select the option for more. When You Select You Can Mic. off Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone on, select the option again. Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cell phone for a more private conversation. When selected, the audio display will indicate the call is private. Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display will indicate the call is on hold. Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system numeric keypad, for example numbers for passwords. Join Calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of three callers on a multi-party or conference call. 1. Select the option for more. 2. Access the desired contact through the system or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, select the option for more. 246 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ When You Select You Can 3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button. Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts. 1. Select the option for more. 2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access your call history log. 1. Select the option for more. 2. Scroll to the option for call history appears and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. 1. Press the PHONE button to enter the cell phone menu. 2. Select one of the options available. Accessing Features Through the Cell Phone Menu You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages as well as access cell phone and system settings. You can also access advanced features such as emergency assistance. When You Select You Can Dial a number Dial a number using the audio system numeric keypad. Redial Redial the last number called (if available). Press the OK button to select. 1 Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook. 1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use the options at the bottom of the screen to quickly access an alphabetical category. You can also use the letters on the keypad to jump in the list. 2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. 247 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ When You Select Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select either incoming calls, outgoing calls or missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection. 3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook and call history each time your cell phone connects to the system. You must turn on the auto download feature if your cell phone supports it. Speed Dial Select one of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry, go to the phonebook and press and hold one of the numbers on the audio system numeric keypad. 1 Text message Send, download and delete text messages. BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth device menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on or off, delete). 1 Phone settings 1 Emergency Assistance 1 You Can View various settings and features on your cell phone. Turn the SYNC emergency assistance feature on or off. This is a cell phone dependent feature. You have these options: • Select the listen option to have the system read the message to you. • Select the view option to open the text message. Select the ignore option or do nothing and the message goes into your text message inbox. Once selected, you have the ability to have the message read out to you, to view other messages or to select the more option. Text Messaging Note: This is a cell phone dependent feature. The system allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road. Receiving a Text Message Note: Your cell phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message. When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the audio display indicates you have a new message. 248 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ • • Press the voice button and say "Read text message". Select the more option and use the arrow buttons to scroll through further options. Choose from the following: • Reply to sender: Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the list of pre-defined messages to send. • Call sender: Press the OK button to call the sender of the message. • Forward msg: Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can also choose to enter a number. • • Delete allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cell phone). The audio display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted. More allows you to delete all messages or to manually trigger a download of all unread messages from your cell phone. When you select the option to send a text message, a list of pre-defined messages appear in the audio display. Sending a Text Message 1. Select the send option when the desired selection is highlighted in the audio display. 2. Select the confirmation option when the contact appears and press the OK button again to confirm when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each text message is sent with a pre-defined signature. Note: You can send text messages either by choosing a contact from the phonebook and selecting the text option from the audio display or by replying to a received message in the inbox. Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select the text messaging option, then press the OK button. A list of all available text messages appears. You can choose from the following options: • New allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages. • View allows you to read the full message and in addition provides the option to have the message read out to you by the system. To go to the next message select the more option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the message. Accessing Your Cell Phone Settings These are cell phone dependent features. Your cell phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ringtone, text message notification, modify your phonebook and set up automatic download. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until the phone settings option appears, then press the OK button. 3. Scroll to select from the following options: 249 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ When You Select You Can Set as master If this option is checked, the system will use this cell phone as the master when there is more than one cell phone paired to the system. This option can be changed for all paired cell phones (not only for the active one) using the Bluetooth devices menu. Phone Status See the cell phone name, provider name, cell phone number, signal level and battery level. When done, press the left arrow button to return to the cell phone status menu. Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's or your cell phone's). 1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each ringtone. 2. Press the OK button to select. If your cell phone supports in-band ringing, your cell phone's ringtone sounds when you choose the cell phone ringtone option. Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. 1. Press the OK button to turn the audible tone on or off. Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook, e.g. add, delete, download. Press the OK button to select and scroll between: Add contacts: Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook. Push the desired contacts on your cell phone. Refer to your device's manual on how to push contacts. Delete: Press the OK button to delete the current phonebook and call history. When a message asking you to delete appears, select the option to confirm. The system takes you back to the menu for phone settings. Download now: Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system. Auto-download: Check or uncheck this option to automatically download your phonebook each time your cell phone connects to the system. Downloading times are cell phone dependent and quantity dependent. When automatic download is switched on, any changes, additions or deletions saved in the system since your last download are deleted. 250 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ When You Select You Can When automatic download is switched off, your phonebook will not be downloaded when your cell phone connects to the system. Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be accessed when your paired cell phone is connected to the system. Bluetooth Devices Menu Options Bluetooth Devices 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until the Bluetooth device option appears, then press the OK button. 3. Scroll to select from the following options: This menu provides access to your Bluetooth devices. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options. It allows you to add, connect and delete devices and set a cell phone as primary. When You Select You Can Add Pair additional cell phones to the system. 1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process. 2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your cell phone. Refer to your device's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 4. When the option to set the cell phone as the primary cell phone appears, select either yes or no. 5. Depending on the functionality of your cell phone, you may be asked extra questions (for example. if you would like to download your phonebook). Select either yes or no to confirm your response. Delete Delete a paired cell phone. Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a cell phone from the list, the cell phone can only be connected again by repeating the full pairing process. Master Set a previously paired cell phone as your primary cell phone. Select the master option to confirm the primary cell phone. 251 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ When You Select You Can The system attempts to connect with the primary cell phone every time you switch the ignition on. When a cell phone is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk. Conn. Connect a previously paired cell phone. You can only have one cell phone connected at a time to use the cell phone functionality. When another cell phone is connected, the previous cell phone will be disconnected from the telephone services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for the cell phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio music playback feature at the same time. Select this option to connect to the selected previously paired cell phone. Discon. Disconnects the selected cell phone. Select this option and confirm when asked to. After disconnecting a cell phone, it can be connected again without repeating the full pairing process. 2. Select the SYNC settings option, then press the OK button. System Settings 1. Press the MENU button. When You Select You Can Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to turn the Bluetooth interface of the system on or off. Select this option then press the OK button to change the option's status. Set defaults Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). Select this option and confirm when Set defaults? appears in the audio display. Master reset Completely erase all information stored on the system (phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to the factory default settings. Select this option and confirm when Master reset? appears in the audio display. The display indicates when complete and the system takes you back to the SYNCSettings menu. Install on SYNC Install applications or software updates you have downloaded. 252 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ When You Select You Can Select this option and confirm when Install on SYNC appears in the audio display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update available on the USB thumb drive in order to finish an installation successfully. System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial number. Press the OK button to select. Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See Using Voice Recognition (page 240). Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB device. Press the OK button and use the up or down arrows to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right arrows to enter and leave a folder. Media content can be directly selected for playback from this menu. Emergency assistance You can turn the emergency assistance feature on or off. See SYNC™ Applications and Services (page 253). WARNINGS SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES Unless the feature setting is switched on prior to a crash, the system will not attempt to place an emergency call which could delay the response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death. Do not wait for the system to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid a delayed response time. If you do not hear emergency assistance within five seconds of the crash, the system or cell phone may be damaged or non-functional. 1. Press the MENU button to enter the system's menu. 2. Scroll to SYNC-Apps, and then press OK. A list of available applications appears. Each application might have its own specific settings. SYNC Emergency Assistance WARNINGS For this feature to work, your cell phone must have Bluetooth and be compatible with the system. Note: Before selecting this feature, you must read the Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. Always place your cell phone in a secure location inside your vehicle. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the cell phone which could prevent this feature from working correctly. 253 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Note: When you switch this feature on or off, that setting applies for all paired cell phones. If you have turned this feature off and a previously paired phone connects when you switch on the ignition, either a voice message plays, a display message or icon is shown or both. Off without voice reminder provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder when your cell phone connects. To make sure that Emergency Assistance works correctly: • The system must have power and be working correctly at the time of the crash and during feature activation and use. • You must switch on the feature before a crash. • You must have a cell phone connected to the system. • In certain countries, it may be necessary to have a valid and registered SIM card with credit in order to place and maintain an emergency call. • A connected cell phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the crash. • A connected cell phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. • Your vehicle must have battery power. Note: Every cell phone operates differently. While this feature works with most cell phones, some cell phones may experience difficulties using this feature. Note: Make sure you are familiar with the information about airbag deployment. See Supplementary Restraints System (page 23). If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the fuel pump shut off, the system may contact emergency services by dialing 112 (the wireless emergency number that works in most European countries) through a paired and connected cell phone. For more information about the system and Emergency Assistance, visit the regional Ford website. Switching Emergency Assistance On and Off Note: This feature only works in a European country or region where SYNC Emergency Assistance can call the local emergency services. Visit the regional Ford website for details. 1. Press the PHONE button to enter the cell phone menu. 2. Select the Emergency Assistance option and press OK. 3. Select the option you require and press OK. In the Event of a Crash Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may turn on Emergency Assistance). However, if Emergency Assistance is triggered the system tries to contact the emergency services. If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses connection to the system, it searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired cell phone. The system attempts to dial 112. Display Options If you switch on this feature, a confirmation message appears in the display. If you switch off this feature, a dialog appears in the display, which allows you to set a voice reminder. Off with voice reminder provides a display and voice reminder when your cell phone connects and your vehicle starts. 254 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Before making a call: • If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes a successful call, an introductory message plays for the emergency operator. After this message, there is hands-free communication between your vehicle's occupants and the operator. • The system provides a short window of time (approximately 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you do not cancel the call, the system attempts to dial 112. • The system plays a message letting you know when it attempts to make an emergency call. You can cancel the call by selecting the relevant icon in the display or by pressing the hang up button on your cell phone. Note: While the system provides information to the emergency operator, the system plays a message letting you know it is sending important information. It then lets you know when the line is open to start hands-free communication. Note: During an Emergency Assistance call, an emergency priority screen appears which contains vehicle GPS coordinates when available. Note: It is possible that GPS location information is not available at the time of the crash; in this case, Emergency Assistance will still attempt to place an emergency call. Note: It is possible that the emergency services will not receive the GPS coordinates; in this case, hands-free communication with an emergency operator is available. During a call: • Emergency assistance uses your vehicle GPS or cellular network information when available to determine the most appropriate language to use. It alerts the emergency operator of the crash and delivers the introductory message. This may include your vehicle GPS coordinates. • The language the system uses to interact with the occupants of your vehicle may differ from the language used to deliver information to the emergency operator. • After the delivery of the introductory message the voice line opens so that you can speak hands-free with the emergency operator. • When the line is connected, you must be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location information immediately. Note: The emergency operator may also receive information from the cellular network such as cell phone number, cell phone location and cell phone carrier name independent from SYNC Emergency Assistance. Emergency assistance may not work if: • Your cell phone or Emergency Assistance hardware sustains damage in the crash. • The vehicle battery or the system has no power. • A crash ejects your cell phone from your vehicle. • You do not have a valid and registered SIM card with credit in your cell phone. • You are in a European country or region where the SYNC Emergency Assistance cannot place the call. Visit the regional Ford website for details. 255 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Important Information about the Emergency Assistance Feature To Connect Using Voice Commands 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. 2. Press the voice button and when prompted, say "USB". 3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. Refer to the media voice commands. Emergency assistance does not currently call emergency services in the following markets: Albania, Belarus, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Macedonia, Netherlands, Ukraine, Moldova and Russia. Visit the regional Ford website for latest details. To Connect Using the System Menu Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. 2. Press the AUX button until an initializing message appears in the display. 3. Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play menu. When you switch on Emergency Assistance, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off. This feature has the capability to disclose your location information to the emergency operator or other details about your vehicle or crash to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch on the feature. Press Browse. Now you can scroll through the list: • Play all. • Playlists. • Songs. • Artists. • Albums. • Genres. • Browse USB. • Reset USB. • Exit. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your media player through your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories such as artist or albums. SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any media player including: iPod, Zune, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. What's Playing? At any time during playback, you can press the voice button and ask the system what is playing. The system reads the metadata tags (if populated) of the current track. Connecting Your Media Player to the USB Port Note: If your media player has a power switch, make sure you switch on the device. 256 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Media Voice Commands Press the voice button and when prompted say "USB", and then any of the following: "USB" "Pause" "Play track " "Play" "Repeat off" "Play album " "Repeat on" 1,2 "Play All" "Search album " 1,2 "Search artist " 1,2 "Search genre " "Play artist " "Play genre " "Play next folder" 1,2 3 1,2 "Search song " "Play next track" "Search track " "Play playlist " "Play previous folder" 1,2 1 1 1,2 "Shuffle off" 1,2 "Shuffle on" 3 "Play previous track" "Similar music" "What's playing?" 1 "Play song " 1 is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything such as desired group, artist or song. 2 Voice commands that are not available until indexing is complete. 3 Voice commands that are only available in folder mode. 257 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Voice command guide "Search genre" or "Play genre" The system searches all the data from your indexed music and if available, begins to play the chosen type of music. You can only play genres of music that are present in the genre metadata tags that you have on your media player. "Similar music" The system compiles a playlist and then plays similar music to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed metadata information. Search or Play, "Artist", "Track, or "Album" The system searches for a specific artist, track or album from the music indexed through the USB port. To switch on the Bluetooth audio, use the AUX or Source button or press the voice button. When prompted say, "Bluetooth audio", then any of the following: The system is also capable of playing music from your cell phone via Bluetooth. "Bluetooth Audio" "Connections" "Pause" "Play" "Play next track" "Play previous track" 1. Press AUX to select USB playback and then Options to enter the Media menu. 2. Scroll to cycle through: Media Menu Features The media menu allows you to select how to play your music (such as by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat) and to find similar music or reset the index of your USB devices. 258 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ When you select You can Shuffle playlist and Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing. Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage device mode they are available in voice recognition, Play menu browsing and Similar Music. The system places Unknowns into any unpopulated metadata tag. Reset SYNC USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete you can choose what to play from the USB song library. 1. Make sure you plug your device into your vehicle's USB port and switch it on. 2. Press AUX to select USB playback and then Browse. Accessing Your USB Song Library This menu allows you to select and play your media files by artist, album, genre, playlist and track or even to browse what is on your USB device. If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll through and select: When you select Play all You can Play all indexed media files from your playing device one * at a time in numerical order. Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the display. Playlists Access your playlists (from formats such as .ASX, .M3U, * .WPL or .MTP). 1. Press OK to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press OK. Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track. 1. Press OK to select. 259 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 * SYNC™ When you select You can 2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press OK. Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. Once selected, the system lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabet* ically. 1. Press OK to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press OK. Albums Sort all indexed media files by albums. 1. Press OK to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired albums, and then press OK. Genres Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. 1. Press OK to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press OK. Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player connected to the USB port. You can only view media files that are compatible with SYNC; other saved files are not visible. 1. Press OK to select. 2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on your flash drive, and then press OK. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete, you can choose what to play from the USB song library. * * * You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the numeric keypad to jump in the list. Bluetooth Devices and System Settings SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING You can access these menus using the audio display. See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 243). Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please refer to the tables below. To check your cell phone's compatibility, visit the regional Ford website. 260 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution A lot of background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your cell phone may be affecting SYNC performance. Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the Possible cell phone other person malfunction. but they cannot hear me. This is a cell phonedependent feature. SYNC is not able to download my phone- Possible cell phone book. malfunction. Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again. Make sure that the microphone for SYNC is not set to off. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by selecting the option to add. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by selecting the option to add. The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell SYNC phonephone's capability. book is empty or is missing contacts. I am having trouble connecting my cell phone to SYNC. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to your cell phone's memory. Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again. 261 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Try deleting your device from SYNC and deleting SYNC from your device, then trying again. Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your cell phone. Update your cell phone's firmware. Switch off the auto download setting. This is a cell phoneText messaging dependent feature. is not working Possible cell phone on SYNC. malfunction. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again. Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Audible text messages do not work on my cell phone. Access the text messaging menu of SYNC to see if your cell phone supports the feature. Press the PHONE button and then scroll and select the option for text messaging, then press OK. Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual for the specific cell This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be tion. differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider and software version. 262 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ USB and media issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Try switching off the device, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again. I am having trouble connecting my device. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. Possible device malfuncMake sure correctly insert the USB cable to tion. the device and your vehicle's USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or active security settings. SYNC does not Make sure you are not leaving the device in recognize my This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold device when I temperatures. start my vehicle. This is a deviceBluetooth audio dependent feature. does not The device is not stream. connected. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC and press play on your device. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated. information. SYNC does not recognize music The file may be that is on my corrupted. device. The song may have copyright protection that does not allow it to play. When I connect my iPhone or iPod Touch through the USB and This is a device limitation. Bluetooth Audio at the same time, I sometimes do not hear any sound. Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to media transfer protocol class. From the iPhone or iPod Touch music now playing screen, select the audio device airplay icon at the very bottom of your iPhone or iPod Touch screen. To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch through Bluetooth Audio, select SYNC. To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch through USB, select Dock Connector. 263 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue SYNC does not understand what I am saying. Possible cause Possible solution Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections. You may be using the wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list of voice commands there. You may be speaking too The microphone for the system is either in soon or at the wrong your rear view mirror or in the headliner just time. above the windshield. You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section. You may not be saying SYNC does not the name exactly as the understand the system saved it. name of a song or artist. Say the song or artist exactly as the system saved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If the song titles are in capital letters, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to say "L-O-L-A". The system may not be reading the name the Do not use special characters in the title, same way you are saying as the system does not recognize them. it. SYNC does not understand or is calling the You may be using the wrong contact wrong voice commands. when I want to make a call. Review the cell phone voice commands at the beginning of the cell phone section. You can also use the cell phone and media suggestion lists to get a list of possible suggestions when the system cannot fully understand you. See Using Voice Recognition (page 240). 264 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution You may not be saying the name exactly as the system saved it. Make sure you are saying the name exactly as the system saved it. For example, if the contact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe Wilson". The system works better if you list full names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe". Contacts in your phonebook may be very short and similar or they may contain special characters. Do not use special characters such as 123 or ICE as the system does not recognize them. Your phonebook contacts may be in capital letters. If the contacts are in capital letters, you have to spell them. JAKE requires you to say "Call J-A-K-E". SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the contact names stored on your cell phone. The SYNC voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign names stored on my cell phone. You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC. The SYNC voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign tracks, artists, albums, genres and playlist names from my media player or USB flash drive. You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC. Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE. Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC will read the contact name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting. SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names (for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunciation for these artists. 265 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution SYNC uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded human voice. The system generates voice prompts and SYNC uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt ation of some technology. words may not be accurate for my language. My previous Bluetooth voice control system allowed me to control the radio, CD, and climate control systems. Why can I not control these systems with SYNC? SYNC offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example," play artist Madonna). The focus of SYNC is to control your mobile devices and the content stored on them. SYNC offers significant capability beyond the previous system such as dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, " play artist Madonna). 266 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 SYNC™ General Issue The language selected for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display does not match the SYNC language (phone, USB, Bluetooth audio, voice control and voice prompts). Possible cause Possible solution SYNC only supports four languages in a single module for text display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most popular languages spoken. If the selected language is not available, SYNC remains in the current active language. SYNC does not support the currently selected language for the instrument cluster and inform- SYNC offers several new voice control ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages. display. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, play artist Madonna). 267 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY WARNINGS The radio frequency transmitter equipment (e.g. cellular telephones, amateur radio transmitters etc.) may only be fitted to your vehicle if they keep to the parameters shown in the table below. There are no special provisions or conditions for installations or use. WARNINGS Your vehicle has been tested and certified to legislations relating to electromagnetic compatibility (72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 or other applicable local requirements). It is your responsibility to make sure that any equipment you have fitted complies with applicable local legislations. Have any equipment fitted by an authorized dealer. Do not mount any transceiver, microphones, speakers, or any other item in the deployment path of the airbag system. Do not fasten antenna cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes. Keep antenna and power cables at least 4 inches (10 centimeters) from any electronic modules and airbags. Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak MHz RMS) Antenna Positions 1 – 30 50 W 3, 4 30 – 54 50 W 1, 2, 3 68 – 87.5 50 W 1, 2, 3 268 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak MHz RMS) 142 – 176 50 W 1, 2, 3 380 – 512 50 W 1, 2, 3 806 – 940 10 W 1, 2, 3 1200 – 1400 10 W 1, 2, 3 1710 – 1885 10 W 1, 2, 3 1885 – 2025 10 W 1, 2, 3 Note: After the installation of radio frequency transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in your vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes. Check all electrical equipment: • with the ignition ON • with the engine running • during a road test at various speeds. • Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements. END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA) • Antenna Positions You have acquired a device ("DEVICE") that includes software licensed by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation ("MS") . Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, 269 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 and "online" or electronic documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. Appendices • • The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as "SOFTWARE". Description of Other Rights and Limitations • • IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • • You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. 270 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • • SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade. • • • 271 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE. Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, Appendices supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components"). • If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s). FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. • Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE. UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. 272 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their affiliates or suppliers. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00). EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/. • 273 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. Appendices Adobe WARNING Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe® Flash® Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel. End User Notice Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information General Operation This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction, reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action. Voice Command Control: Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel. Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time. Read and follow instructions: Before using your Windows Automotive- based system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("User's Guide"). Not following precautions found in this User's Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences. Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first time, all persons have access to the User's Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully. 274 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices Use of Speech Recognition Functions: Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. TeleNav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. 1. Safe and Lawful Use Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, 275 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. 3.1 License Limitations You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that (i) infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav. You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. 2. Account Information You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. 3. Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon 276 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices 4. Disclaimers 5. Limitation of Liability To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. 6. Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the 277 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices 8. Miscellaneous Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. 8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. 8.2 This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement 7. Assignment 8.3 You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. 278 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices 8.5 installed, copied, or used the Data, you must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") within thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To contact NT, please visit www.navteq.com. If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms (this "End User License Agreement") and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation". The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®. 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service ® to publish and sell ZIP+4 ® information. The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to TeleNav's third party vendor licensors: © United States Postal Service ® 2009. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service ® The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4. The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. NavTeq End User License Agreement TERMS AND CONDITIONS END USER TERMS License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal, noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise The content provided ("Data") is licensed, not sold. By opening this package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use, resell or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement, and have not 279 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. WARNING This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof. No Warranty: This Data is provided to you "as is" , and you agree to use it at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free. Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS 280 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect. Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a "commercial term" as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following "Notice of Use", and be treated in accordance with such Notice: NOTICE OF USE Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) NAME: NAVTEQ CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606. 281 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided. © 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire, © 2013 JiWire. Gracenote® Copyright You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents #5,987,525, #6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459, #6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). 282 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Appendices become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. © Gracenote 2007. THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 283 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 284 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index A Audio System................................................190 General Information..........................................190 Audio System Security...............................219 Audio Troubleshooting..............................229 Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/Bluetooth............................196 A/C See: Climate Control...........................................75 About This Manual...........................................5 Protecting the Environment...............................5 Alternative Frequencies...................................201 Automatic Volume Control.............................201 Autostore Control.............................................200 News Broadcasts...............................................201 Regional Mode.....................................................201 Sound Button......................................................199 Station Preset Buttons...................................200 Station Tuning Control.....................................199 Traffic Information Control............................200 Waveband Button..............................................199 ABS See: Brakes...........................................................109 ABS driving hints See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes................................................................109 Accessories See: Replacement Parts Recommendation..............................................7 Active City Stop..............................................119 General Information...........................................119 Laser Sensor Information................................120 Using Active City Stop.......................................119 Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/Navigation System..........202 Alternative Frequencies...................................207 Automatic Volume Control...........................206 Autostore Control.............................................206 News Broadcasts..............................................206 Regional Mode....................................................207 Station Preset Buttons....................................205 Station Tuning Control....................................205 Traffic Information Control............................206 Waveband Button.............................................205 Adjusting the Headlamps..........................161 Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................42 Air Conditioning See: Climate Control...........................................75 Air Vents.............................................................75 Center Air Vents....................................................75 Side Air Vent...........................................................75 Alarm See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................39 Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD....................................................191 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................39 Alarm System........................................................39 Arming the Alarm................................................40 Disarming the Alarm..........................................40 Full and Reduced Guard...................................40 Triggering the Alarm...........................................40 Alternative Frequencies...................................195 Automatic Volume Control.............................194 Autostore Control...............................................194 News Broadcasts...............................................195 Regional Mode.....................................................195 Sound Button.......................................................193 Station Preset Buttons.....................................193 Station Tuning Control.....................................193 Traffic Information Control.............................194 Waveband Button..............................................193 Appendices....................................................268 At a Glance..........................................................9 Front Exterior Overview........................................9 Instrument Panel Overview................................11 Rear Exterior Overview........................................14 Vehicle Interior Overview...................................10 Audible Warnings and Indicators..............61 Automatic Transmission....................................61 Headlamps On.......................................................61 Key Outside Car.....................................................61 Low Fuel...................................................................61 Safety Belt Minder...............................................62 Audio Control...................................................42 .....................................................................................42 285 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index B Audio unit - Vehicles With: Navigation System/Sony AM/FM/CD......................214 Alternative Frequencies...................................219 Automatic Volume Control.............................218 Autostore Control................................................217 Digital Signal Processing.................................218 News Broadcasts................................................218 Regional Mode.....................................................219 Sound Button.......................................................216 Station Preset Buttons......................................217 Station Tuning Control.....................................216 Traffic Information Control..............................217 Waveband Button..............................................216 Bonnet Lock See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........152 Brake and Clutch Fluid Check..................159 Brakes...............................................................109 General Information..........................................109 Breaking-In.....................................................130 Brakes and Clutch..............................................130 Engine.....................................................................130 Tires.........................................................................130 Bulb Specification Chart...........................168 C Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/CD.................................................208 Alternative Frequencies....................................213 Automatic Volume Control.............................212 Autostore Control................................................211 Digital Signal Processing..................................212 News Broadcasts................................................212 Regional Mode.....................................................213 Sound Button.......................................................210 Station Preset Buttons......................................211 Station Tuning Control.....................................210 Traffic Information Control...............................211 Waveband Button..............................................210 Capacities and Specifications................186 Technical Specifications..................................187 Cargo Nets.......................................................122 Installing and Removing the Net...................122 Car Wash See: Cleaning the Exterior................................172 Catalytic Converter.....................................100 Driving with a Catalytic Converter...............100 Changing a Bulb............................................162 Approach Lamp..................................................164 Central High Mounted Brake Lamp.............166 Front Fog Lamps................................................164 Headlamp..............................................................162 Interior Lamp........................................................167 Licence Plate Lamp............................................167 Luggage Compartment Lamp, Footwell Lamp and Liftgate Lamp............................168 Reading Lamps....................................................167 Rear Lamps...........................................................165 Side Lamp.............................................................163 Side Repeater......................................................163 Autolamps........................................................48 Automatic Climate Control.........................77 Temperature Control...........................................79 Automatic Transmission...........................104 Emergency Park Position Release Lever...................................................................106 Hints on Driving With an Automatic Transmission...................................................106 Selector Lever Positions..................................104 Sport Mode and Manual Shifting.................105 Auto-Start-Stop.............................................96 Changing a Fuse...........................................150 Changing a Road Wheel............................179 To Re-Start the Engine.......................................97 To Stop the Engine..............................................96 Using Start-Stop..................................................96 Assembling the Wheel Brace.........................181 Installing a Road Wheel...................................182 Jacking and Lifting Points...............................180 Lug Nuts.................................................................179 Removing a Road Wheel.................................182 Removing the Wheel Trim................................181 Vehicle Jack...........................................................179 Vehicles With a Spare Wheel.........................179 Autowipers.......................................................44 Auxiliary Input Jack.....................................228 Auxiliary Power Points.................................88 12 Volt DC Power Point......................................88 Location...................................................................88 Changing the 12V Battery..........................159 286 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index Changing the Wiper Blades.....................160 Compact Disc Player - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD...................................................221 Rear Window Wiper Blade.............................160 Windshield Wiper Blades................................160 CD Text Display Options.................................224 Compact Disc Playback...................................221 Compact Disc Track Scanning.......................221 Ending Compact Disc Playback...................224 Fast Forward and Reverse...............................221 MP3 and WMA Display Options...................224 MP3 and WMA File Playback........................222 Repeat Compact Disc Tracks.........................221 Shuffle and Random.........................................221 Track Selection....................................................221 Checking MyKey System Status................31 MyKey Distance.....................................................32 Number of Admin Keys......................................32 Number of MyKeys...............................................32 Checking the Wiper Blades......................160 Childminder Mirror.........................................56 Child Safety.......................................................15 Child Safety Locks.........................................20 Left-Hand Side.....................................................20 Right-Hand Side...................................................20 Coolant Check Child Seat Positioning...................................18 Cigar Lighter.....................................................88 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................173 Cleaning the Exterior....................................172 See: Engine Coolant Check............................158 Creating a MyKey...........................................30 Vehicles with Keyless Starting.........................31 Vehicles without Keyless Starting.................30 Body Paintwork Preservation.........................172 Cleaning the Chrome Trim...............................172 Cleaning the Headlamps..................................172 Cleaning the Rear Window..............................172 Cruise Control..................................................43 Cleaning the Interior.....................................172 Cup Holders.....................................................89 Principle of Operation........................................117 Cruise control See: Using Cruise Control..................................117 Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens and Radio Screens.........................................173 Rear Windows......................................................173 Safety Belts...........................................................172 D Daytime Running Lamps............................49 Diesel Particulate Filter................................94 Clearing All MyKeys........................................31 Climate Control...............................................75 Regeneration.........................................................94 Digital Audio...................................................219 Principle of Operation.........................................75 Clock...................................................................66 ...................................................................................219 Type 1........................................................................66 Type 2.......................................................................66 Direction Indicators........................................51 Dog Guard........................................................122 DPF Cold Weather Precautions........................130 Compact Disc Player - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/Bluetooth/Sony AM/FM/CD..................................................224 See: Diesel Particulate Filter............................94 Driver Airbag.....................................................23 .....................................................................................23 Driver Knee Airbag.........................................25 Driving Aids......................................................119 Driving Hints...................................................130 Driving Through Water...............................130 CD Text Display Options..................................227 Compact Disc Playback..................................224 Compact Disc Track Scanning......................225 Ending Compact Disc Playback....................227 Fast Forward and Reverse..............................225 MP3 and WMA Display Options...................227 MP3 and WMA File Playback........................225 Repeat Compact Disc Tracks........................225 Shuffle and Random........................................225 Track Selection...................................................225 ...................................................................................130 DRL See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................49 E Electromagnetic compatibility..............268 287 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index End User License Agreement.................269 Fuse Box Locations......................................134 SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA)..............................................................269 Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................134 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............134 Engine Coolant Check................................158 Fuses.................................................................134 Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built From: 05-01-2013.....................................144 Adding Engine Coolant.....................................158 Engine Immobilizer See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................39 Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................144 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............147 Engine Oil Check...........................................157 Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built Up To: 04-01-2013....................................135 Adding Oil..............................................................158 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.0L EcoBoost™..................................................157 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.4L Duratec-16V (Sigma)/1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma).........................................................157 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi/1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...................................................157 Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................135 Passenger's Compartment Fuse Box - Type 1.............................................................................138 Passenger's Compartment Fuse Box - Type 2...........................................................................140 G ....................................................................................157 Exterior Mirrors................................................54 Gauges...............................................................58 Electric Folding Mirrors.......................................54 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................55 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................54 Fuel Gauge..............................................................58 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................26 Glasses Holder................................................89 Global Opening and Closing......................56 F Global Closing.......................................................56 Global Opening.....................................................56 Fastening the Safety Belts...........................21 Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........22 H First Aid Kit......................................................132 Flat Tire Inflation Handbrake See: Temporary Mobility Kit............................174 Floor Mats.......................................................130 Fog Lamps - Front See: Parking Brake.............................................109 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................132 Headlamp Exit Delay....................................49 Headlamp Leveling.......................................50 See: Front Fog Lamps........................................49 Fog Lamps - Rear See: Rear Fog Lamps.........................................50 Recommended Headlamp Leveling Switch Positions..............................................................51 Front Fog Lamps............................................49 Front Seat Armrest........................................87 Fuel and Refueling........................................98 Head Restraints..............................................83 Fuel Consumption.......................................102 .....................................................................................83 Adjusting the Head Restraints........................83 Removing the Head Restraint.........................84 Calculating Fuel Economy..............................103 Filling the Tank....................................................102 Heated Seats...................................................87 Heated Windows and Mirrors....................82 Technical Specifications..................................103 Fuel Consumption Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................82 Heated Windows..................................................82 See: Technical Specifications........................103 Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................99 Heating Long-Term Storage.............................................99 See: Climate Control...........................................75 Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................99 Long-Term Storage.............................................99 288 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index J Hill Start Assist..............................................107 Switching the System On and Off................107 Using Hill Start Assist........................................107 Jump-Starting the Vehicle.........................132 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate............................................................79 To Connect the Booster Cables.....................132 To Start the Engine.............................................133 Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................80 General Hints.........................................................79 Heating the Interior Quickly.............................80 Maximum Cooling Performance in Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions.................................82 Recommended Settings for Cooling ............81 Recommended Settings for Heating...........80 Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather...............................................................81 Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods During Extreme High Ambient Temperatures....................................................81 K Keyless Entry....................................................36 Disabled Keys........................................................38 General Information............................................36 Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade............................................................38 Locking Your Vehicle............................................37 Passive Key..............................................................37 Unlocking Your Vehicle......................................38 Keyless Starting.............................................90 Ignition Switch................................................90 Information Displays.....................................63 Failure to Start........................................................91 Ignition On...............................................................91 Starting a Diesel Engine.....................................91 Starting With Automatic Transmission......................................................91 Starting With Manual Transmission..............91 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving.................................................................92 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary...........................................................92 General Information............................................63 Keys and Remote Controls.........................26 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................109 Hood Lock See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........152 I Information Messages..................................67 Installing Child Seats.....................................15 L Attaching a Child Seat with Top Tethers..................................................................17 Booster Seats.........................................................16 Child Seats for Different Mass Groups..........15 ISOFIX Anchor Points...........................................17 Top Tether Anchor Points...................................17 Lighting Control...............................................47 Headlamp Flasher...............................................48 High Beams............................................................48 Lighting Control Positions.................................47 Parking Lamps.......................................................47 Instrument Cluster........................................58 Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................49 Lighting...............................................................47 .....................................................................................49 Load Carrying..................................................121 General Information............................................47 Interior Lamps..................................................51 General Information............................................121 Courtesy Lamp.......................................................51 Reading Lamps.....................................................52 Locking and Unlocking.................................34 Locking and Unlocking the Doors From Inside....................................................................34 Locking and Unlocking the Doors With the Key........................................................................34 Power Door Locks................................................34 Remote Control....................................................34 Interior Mirror...................................................55 Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................55 Introduction........................................................5 Locks...................................................................34 289 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index N Luggage Anchor Points................................121 Luggage Covers.............................................122 Removing the Cover...........................................122 Navigation......................................................230 Lug Nuts Hazard Spot Warning.......................................237 Information..........................................................234 Loading Map Data.............................................230 Menu Structure....................................................231 Navigation Map Updates................................238 Road Safety.........................................................230 Route Options.....................................................233 Setting a Route....................................................231 Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........234 Type Approvals...................................................238 See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................179 M Maintenance...................................................152 General Information..........................................152 Technical Specifications..................................169 Manual Climate Control..............................76 Manual Liftgate...............................................36 Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................36 O Manual Seats..................................................85 Adjusting the Height of the Driver’s Seat......................................................................85 Adjusting the Lumbar Support.......................85 Folding the Passenger's Seat Forward...............................................................85 Moving the Seat Backward and Forward...............................................................85 Recline Adjustment.............................................85 Oil Check See: Engine Oil Check........................................157 Opening and Closing the Hood...............152 Closing the Hood................................................153 Opening the Hood..............................................152 P Manual Transmission.................................104 Selecting Reverse Gear....................................104 Parking Aid.......................................................112 Message Center Front and Rear Sensing System.....................113 Rear Sensing System..........................................113 See: Information Displays.................................63 Mirrors Parking Aids.....................................................112 See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................82 See: Windows and Mirrors................................53 Principle of Operation........................................112 Parking Brake.................................................109 Mobile Communications Equipment........8 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................32 All Vehicles..............................................................32 Vehicles With Push Button Start....................33 All Vehicles.............................................................110 Vehicles With Automatic Transmission...................................................109 Vehicles With Manual Transmission...........109 MyKey™.............................................................30 Passenger Airbag...........................................24 Principle of Operation........................................30 .....................................................................................24 Switching the Passenger Airbag Off.............24 Switching the Passenger Airbag On..............24 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................39 Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................39 Coded Keys.............................................................39 Disarming the Engine Immobilizer................39 Principle of Operation........................................39 PATS See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................39 Personalized Settings...................................67 Measure Units........................................................67 Switching Chimes Off.........................................67 290 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index Power Door Locks Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control.............................................................29 Roadside Emergencies...............................132 Running-In See: Locking and Unlocking.............................34 Power Windows..............................................53 Accessory Delay....................................................54 Bounce-Back.........................................................53 One-Touch Down.................................................53 One-Touch Up.......................................................53 Window Lock.........................................................53 See: Breaking-In..................................................130 Running Out of Fuel......................................99 Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container..........................................................100 Programming a MyKey..................................31 S Optional Settings..................................................31 R Safety Belt Minder..........................................22 Turning the Safety Belt Minder Off................22 Rear Fog Lamps.............................................50 Rear Seats........................................................86 Safety Belts.......................................................21 Safety Precautions........................................98 Seats...................................................................83 Security..............................................................39 Side Airbags.....................................................24 Side Curtain Airbags......................................25 Sitting in the Correct Position...................83 Sliding Door......................................................35 Snow Chains Folding the Seatback.........................................86 Unfolding the Seatback....................................86 Rear Under Floor Storage...........................121 Adjustable Load Floor........................................121 Rear View Camera.........................................114 Switching the Rear View Camera Off..........116 Switching the Rear View Camera On...........115 Using the Display.................................................115 Vehicles with Parking Aid.................................116 See: Using Snow Chains..................................178 Speed Control Rear View Camera See: Cruise Control..............................................117 Stability Control..............................................111 See: Rear View Camera.....................................114 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........45 Principle of Operation.........................................111 Starter Switch Intermittent Wipe.................................................45 Rear Window Washer.........................................46 Reverse Gear Wipe..............................................46 See: Ignition Switch............................................90 Starting a Diesel Engine..............................94 Refueling...........................................................101 Remote Control..............................................26 Cold or Hot Engine...............................................94 Failure to Start......................................................94 Changing the Remote Control Battery.........27 Programming a New Remote Control..........26 Remote Control With a Folding Key Blade.....................................................................27 Remote Control Without a Folding Key Blade....................................................................28 Reprogramming the Unlocking Function..............................................................26 Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................93 Cold or Hot Engine...............................................93 Engine Idle Speed after Starting....................93 Failure to Start.......................................................93 Flooded Engine.....................................................93 Starting and Stopping the Engine...........90 General Information...........................................90 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With: Keyless Entry and Push Button Start/Push Button Start...........................92 Removing a Headlamp................................161 Repairing Minor Paint Damage................173 Replacement Parts Recommendation..........................................7 Unlocking the Steering Wheel........................93 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without: Keyless Entry and Push Button Start/Push Button Start...........................92 Steering Wheel................................................42 Storage Compartments..............................89 Collision Repairs......................................................7 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs....................................................................7 Warranty on Replacement Parts......................8 291 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index Supplementary Restraints System.........23 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels Vehicles With: Automatic Transmission...............................................128 Principle of Operation.........................................23 Switching Off the Engine............................95 Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................95 Emergency Towing.............................................129 Symbols Glossary.............................................5 SYNC™ Applications and Services........................................................253 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels Vehicles With: Manual Transmission...............................................128 Towing...............................................................124 Transmission..................................................104 Transmission In the Event of a Crash.....................................254 Switching Emergency Assistance On and Off.......................................................................254 SYNC Emergency Assistance........................253 See: Transmission..............................................104 SYNC™............................................................239 Trip Computer.................................................66 General Information.........................................239 ....................................................................................66 Distance Odometer.............................................67 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................260 T U Tailgate Under Hood Overview - 1.0L EcoBoost™..................................................154 Under Hood Overview - 1.4L Duratec-16V (Sigma)/1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma).........................................................155 Under Hood Overview - 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi/1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel..................................................156 Unique Driving Characteristics.................96 Using Cruise Control.....................................117 See: Manual Liftgate...........................................36 Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications.............186 Temporary Mobility Kit................................174 General Information...........................................174 Inflating the Tire...................................................175 Using the Kit..........................................................174 Tire Care............................................................177 Tire Inflation When Punctured See: Temporary Mobility Kit............................174 Switching Cruise Control Off..........................118 Switching Cruise Control On............................117 Tire Pressure Monitoring System............178 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems..........................................................32 Using Snow Chains......................................178 System Reset........................................................179 Tire Repair Kit See: Temporary Mobility Kit............................174 Tires Vehicles with Stability Control.......................178 Using Stability Control..................................111 See: Wheels and Tires.......................................174 Tow Ball............................................................125 .....................................................................................111 Driving With a Trailer.........................................126 Driving Without a Trailer...................................127 Inserting the Tow Ball Arm..............................125 Maintenance.........................................................127 Removing the Tow Ball Arm...........................126 Unlocking the Tow Ball Arm Mechanism.......................................................125 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player............................................................256 Accessing Your USB Song Library...............259 Bluetooth Devices and System Settings............................................................260 Connecting Your Media Player to the USB Port....................................................................256 Media Menu Features......................................258 Media Voice Commands.................................257 What's Playing?.................................................256 Towing a Trailer.............................................124 Trailer Lighting......................................................125 When towing a trailer:.......................................124 Towing Points.................................................127 292 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 Index W Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............243 Accessing Features Through the Cell Phone Menu..................................................................247 Accessing Your Cell Phone Settings...........249 Bluetooth Devices..............................................251 Cell Phone Options During an Active Call.....................................................................246 Cell Phone Voice Commands.......................244 Making a Call.......................................................246 Pairing a Cell Phone For the First Time...................................................................243 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................243 Receiving a Call..................................................246 Text Messaging...................................................248 Warning Lamps and Indicators................58 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Lamp....................................................................59 Brake System Warning Lamp..........................59 Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp..........59 Cruise Control Indicator.....................................59 Direction Indicator Warning Lamp.................59 Door Ajar Warning Lamp...................................59 Engine Warning Lamps......................................59 Exterior Lamps On Indicator............................60 Front Airbag Warning Lamp............................60 Front Fog Lamp Indicator.................................60 Frost Warning Lamp...........................................60 Glow Plug Indicator.............................................60 High Beam Indicator...........................................60 Ignition Warning Lamp......................................60 Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp.......................60 Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp.................60 Message Center Indicator.................................60 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp..............................61 Power Steering Warning Lamp........................61 Rear Fog Lamp Indicator....................................61 Safety Belt Minder Warning Lamp.................61 Shift Indicator.........................................................61 Stability Control Indicator..................................61 Using Voice Recognition...........................240 Helpful Hints.......................................................240 Initiating a Voice Session.................................241 System Interaction and Feedback...............241 Using Winter Tires.........................................177 V Vehicle Care.....................................................172 Vehicle Identification Number.................187 Vehicle Identification Plate......................186 Ventilation See: Climate Control...........................................75 Vents Warning Triangle...........................................132 Washer Fluid Check.....................................159 Washers See: Air Vents.........................................................75 VIN See: Vehicle Identification Number.............187 See: Cleaning the Exterior................................172 See: Wipers and Washers.................................44 Voice Control...................................................43 Wheel Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................179 Wheels and Tires...........................................174 General Information...........................................174 Technical Specifications..................................183 Windows and Mirrors....................................53 Windshield Washers.....................................45 Windshield Wipers........................................44 Intermittent Wipe................................................44 Speed Dependent Wipers................................44 Winter Tires See: Using Winter Tires.....................................177 Wipers and Washers.....................................44 293 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 294 B-MAX (CB2) Vehicles Built From: 25-06-2012, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2013 CG3573en